Home
Backup4all - Take full control of your backup
Contents
1. 212 Backup4all 5 e Delete removes the selected scheduled task e Refresh refreshes the scheduled tasks list There are several columns in the Schedulers window that provide information for each scheduled task e Enabled if the checkbox is marked then the scheduled task will run if is unchecked it will not be executed e Job Type shows the job type e Scheduler shows the scheduler type Windows or Shutdown e Run in shows if the scheduled task will run using the main interface or in background e Action shows the type of action associated with the scheduled task default full differential incremental cleanup test e Backup Type shows the backup type set in scheduler e Task file shows the name of the task file e Status displays the status of the scheduled task e Next Run Time calculates the next date and time when the scheduled task will run e Last Run Time shows the last date and time when the scheduled task ran e Schedule shows the type of schedule selected for the task e User shows the user name for which the job is scheduled to run The scheduled tasks in the list can be sorted by clicking on the column headers The right click menu on the column header provides a handy way to show hide columns except the Enabled which are grayed out You can also drag a column header on the above grey zone if you want to group the scheduled tasks by that column Options Show warnings and errors If this
2. more time if the files included in archive are large Do not compress files of type The filter can be applied to increase the compression performance It defines what types of files to be stored uncompressed in the zip file These are files that are already compressed e g zip rar mp3 or avi and using the zip compression on them wouldn t result in a smaller sized backup You can use the already defined file types or you can add others using the Default compression filter list in File gt Options gt Backup The result will be that the backup will take less time when using compression Always use temporary folder to create zip files If checked the zip files are created in the temporary folder and then moved to the destination folder This means that there should be enough free disk space on the drive where the temporary folder is located When backing up to removable media CD DVD or Blu ray disc floppy zip disk etc this option is ignored the zip files are always created in the temporary folder and then copied to the destination When backing up to internal hard drives or LAN you should uncheck this option to speed up the backup execution By default this option is not checked Use alternate zipping mode If not checked default zipping mode each file is compressed in blocks that are immediately added to the final zip file If checked alternate zipping mode each file is compressed in blocks in a temporary file When the wh
3. Backup4all y Take full control of your backup Backup4all User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup4all User Manual for Backup4all version 5 by Softland This user manual presents all the features in the Professional edition If you own Lite Standard or Portable some of the features presented in this user manual might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check the feature matrix topic The information in this document is subject to change without notice Although every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this book Softland assumes no responsibility for errors and omissions Nor is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the information contained herein This documentation contains proprietary information of Softland All rights reserved Contents 3 Table of Contents Part Introduction 8 1 Product Description essiri nissio aaa aaa A a a 8 System Require Ment sccccesccecseeceeeeceeeeeseseeeeeneneessaesesneeeeneneeseaaesesneeeneeeseseaeseaneeenseeseseaesaseneeeaees 9 IAstal tion sagedane pads E E den Secs ete Se rade nee ace E AEREE cat eed see ces cg tan Sade TNA 9 Command Line Paramete S a e a er daea mer aaee AO rA Ear na Aa aa Ee a Ea E E EEE a AA aaaea aoea Saenen adati 10 Feat res SUM MaA y r r e aae nut eare eara a an a aa Eana o reo raaa eaaa Pa Epean iaaiaee 10 Feature
4. While the other backup types collect all the files and folders being backed up each time into a single compressed container file a mirror backup keeps all the individual files separately in the destination That is the destination becomes a mirror exact copy of the source You can even directly access files in the destination without needing to use Backup4all s restore feature because each file is just an exact copy of the original One handy feature of mirror backup is Backup4all s Fast mirror option When this option is selected any mirror operation after the first will only copy new and modified files making the operation very fast Another important feature is that users can choose to zip each file individually using the Zip the files option In this case the compression and encryption options can be used A mirror backup cannot keep track of different versions of files However Backup4all provides an option to customize destination folder names using user defined parameters giving you the ability to save each mirror backup in a different folder location Restore using Backup4all is possible only from the latest mirror backup but all previous mirror backups remain available in the destination and can be accessed manually Advantages e The fastest backup type especially in conjunction with the Fast mirror option e t creates a snapshot of the selected files and folders in the destination which you can browse and access later with
5. Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 103 5 13 Filter backups by type Do not delete Full backups If this is checked the full backups will be kept even if they fall into the range of files filtered for deletion Do not delete Differential backups If this is checked the differential backups will be kept even if they fall into the range of files filtered for deletion Note that this option is available only when Do not delete full backups is checked because differential backups depend on full backups Manual selection In this section you can manually select the backup versions you want to delete by clicking the checkbox in front of the backup version Reset to filters Pressing this will ignore any manual selection done and restore the default selection based on the filters applied Options Clean the destination folder Deletes any files and folders inside the destination folder even if they are not related to the backup job Clean process priority Using the Priority slider you can set the test execution speed compared to the rest of the running processes on your computer Default is Normal priority but there are other 4 priority levels Lowest priority Low priority High priority and Highest priority On Lowest priority the test process will consume the minimum amount of computer resources but will take the longer to complete while Highest priority will consume the highest amount
6. Use extended passive mode Y Use XCRC when testing if available v Resume uploads downloads if available Limit file size to 2027 MB v Larger files will be split Timeout seconds 15 Firewall Proxy type None v etp I Advanced SSL encryption Indicates the level of Transport Layer Security TLS required for control channel and data channel connections to the FTP server e No SSL the server does not require Secure Socket Layer transport e Implicit SSL implies that Secure Socket Layer is in use e Only explicit SSL allows the connection to the FTP server only if TLS is available e Explicit SSL if available when SSL is available uses explicit security by default The server allows regular FTP sessions without encryption as well as encrypted FTP sessions using SSL Use passive mode for transfers like WWW browsers Each file transfer upload or download needs an additional connection for the data stream Normally in active mode the server establishes this connection In passive mode however the client establishes the connection This may be necessary through some firewalls which do not allow connections from outside Use extended passive mode The FTP Server operates exactly the same as passive mode however it only transmits the port number not broken into high and low bytes and Backup4all is to assume that it connects to the same IP address that was originally connected to Use this o
7. 2014 Softland Backup Properties 209 execution of the backup On successful test send It indicates the email that will be sent when the test operation is finished with success The default email is lt Default email gt but you can change it using the Open button If you press the Edit button B you can modify the selected email file except the default email Also there is the option to select lt No email gt if you don t want Backup4all to send an email if a test operation was successful On test with errors send It indicates the email that will be sent when the test operation failed because of an error The default email is lt Default email gt but you can change this using the Open button If you press the Edit button E you can modify the selected email file except the default email Also there is the option to select lt No email gt if you don t want Backup4all to send an email if there were errors during the test operation On successful cleanup send It indicates the email that will be sent when the cleanup operation is finished with success The default email is lt Default email gt but you can change it using the Open button If you press the Edit button B you can modify the selected email file except the default email Also there is the option to select lt No email gt if you don t want Backup4all to send an email if the cleanup operation was successful On cleanup with error send
8. Differential O Incremental O Mirror Block backup C Use block backup Automatically decide block size Manually set block size Save storage space No Yes limit number of file versions Yes limit number of backups v Merge backups Customize prefix of backup files 1_C zip Other C Clear archive bit User can select one of these backup types Smart Full Differential Incremental e Mirror The backup type can be changed from the Type page in Backup Properties or from a specific type page by checking the box to select that type as default backup type The smart full differential and incremental backup types use zip compression to reduce the size of the stored backup versions The mirror backup type creates in destination an exact copy of the source file without zipping them Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 185 Block backup When backing up large files which are modified in small parts as database files it is useful to back up only the modified part block of the file without backing up the entire file every time This way you will get smaller and faster backups The size of the block can be determined automatically or manually by settings a smaller larger size for the block size The slider steps are 5 MB smallest size 25 MB smaller size 50 MB default 62 5 MB larger size and 75 MB largest size For files s
9. Restoring a differential backup is a faster process than restoring an incremental backup because only two backup container files are needed the latest full backup and the latest differential backup Backup4all uses the information it has recorded in its catalog file bkc to determine whether a file has changed since the last full backup or not Use differential backup if you have a reasonable amount of time to perform backups The upside is that only two backup container files are needed to perform a complete restore The downside is if you run multiple differential backups after your full backup you re probably including some files in each differential backup that were already included in earlier differential backups but haven t been recently modified Advantages e Restore is faster than restoring from incremental backup e Backing up is faster than a full backup e It uses less storage space than full backup Disadvantages e Restore is slower than restoring from full backup e Backing up is slower than incremental backup e It uses more storage space than incremental backup Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Types 51 3 5 Differential Backup Type in Backup4all Backup4all supports the differential backup type and offers a solution for the slow backup issue In time the differential can grow to a size that is equal or larger than the full version Therefore the following options can be us
10. bke v a Folders Files i Modified Open backup from an SFTP server Use this page if the catalog is on an SFTP server Configure the SFTP server or choose an existing configuration Press Show to display the folders and selected file types bkc or ini Press Scan to display a list of only bkc ini files from all folders and subfolders in that location Here you can see how to configure the SFTP server Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 95 Local hard drive Network FTP server Azure storage Amazon S3 storage jE Open backup from SFTP server Configuration Folder Configure SFTP lt SFTP server not configured gt bkc v B Folders Files Modified Open backup from Azure storage Use this page if the catalog is located on Azure server Configure Azure or choose an existing configuration Press Show to display the folders and selected file types bkc or ini Press Scan to display a list of only bkc ini files from all folders and subfolders in that location Here you can see how to configure Azure Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 96 Backup4all 5 Local hard drive Network FTP server SFTP server Amazon S3 storage Cae Open backup from Azur
11. Backup list visible in the middle column of the main window contains all the backup jobs defined The backup jobs can be are grouped into tags for easy handling Jobs Tags Layout J Navigation Restore Pane Default Layout General Jobs lt Sort by Execution order Descending Last backup All Jobs New Backup View as Failed Jobs Smart HDD C Users Admin Documents My Backup4all Running Jobs Make Backup New Tag Restore backup 2 Smart HDD G Users Admin Documents My Backup4all T est Repair Clean Cancel Pause Type to search 2 m Stop Jobs Job Logs x Create Shortcut lE History Duplicate Backup Ctrl L Scheduler Delete Backup Ctrl Del Properties Ctrl P X Type to search backup jobs To configure a backup job s appearance icon and label in the backup list you have to open the Backup Properties window switch to the General tab change the name of the backup job assign it to an existing tag or create a new tag and select a backup job icon When you backup a tag the backup jobs containing that tag are backed up in the order they are displayed in the tag list Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 74 Backup4all 5 5 4 When right clicking a backup job a menu is displayed giving the following options e View as e Card will display all jobs as cards e List will display all jobs as list e Make Backup
12. Full Differential Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced Save and run CD DVD or Blu ray If the current backup destination is not a CD DVD or Blu ray drive you can change it by checking the Change destination to CD DVD or Blu ray option If the Smart backup type is selected you cannot use CD DVD or Blu ray as backup destination In this case you have to select another backup type Destination You can type a folder name in the Folder field or you can click the Browse button to choose another folder where the backup will be stored In destination folder field you can use Environment Variables as Computername SystemDrive UserName etc Erase before writing When this option is checked the rewritable CD DVD or Blu ray disc is erased before burning the backup files By default this option is not checked Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 157 Write method Burn using built in driver Backup4all has built in burning capabilities Depending on the option selected in CD DVD or Blu ray from Tools gt Options gt Backup one of the internal burners will be used to write the CD DVD or Blu ray disc This option is checked by default Speed Use this option to specify a different speed for burning the CD DVD or Blu ray disc By default this option is set to Maximum speed Use third party packet writing software UDF is a platform independent file system th
13. The manual activation process involves two computers computer A where Backup4all is installed Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Help 299 and computer B the one that has internet access Follow the steps below to copy the activation file from computer A to computer B from where you can obtain the activation response 1 Open Backup4all on computer A The Activate application window will appear If you previously used the trial you need to open the activation window from File gt Help by pressing the Enter product key button Scheduler Layout New backup Support e Open Backup By Open Backup From Backup4all Help 7 Get help using Backup4all Tools F Support Request a Let us know if you need hel at y E amp Options Exit Buy Now Buy Backup4all online Tools for working with Backup4all amp Options Customize language display and other program settings ga Check for Updates Get the latest updates available for Backup4all Backup4all 5 0 TRIAL will expire in 22 days Take full control of your backup 4 About Backup4all Backup4all Version 5 0 Build 221 2013 Softland All rights reserved www backup4all com Registration information Backup4all Professional TRIAL will expire in 22 days Our Projects Backup4all backup software www backup4all com novaPDF PDF creator www novapdf com Software11
14. When changing the backup type between Smart Full Incremental or Differential the older backups are not deleted only the type of the next backup is changed If the Yes limit number of file versions Yes limit number of backups and Merge backups options are used the application will delete or merge older backups so that the number of versions is less or equal to the specified limit However when changing between Mirror and Smart Full Incremental or Differential the older versions are deleted By default the Yes limit number of file versions and the Yes limit number of backups options are not enabled This means that the system will keep all the stored backup versions If you choose to enable the Merge backups option when the limit is reached the system will perform an internal merge between the older versions keeping the number of stored backups equal to the specified limit the merge between zip files is necessary to keep at the latest file version from each zip file to be merged However when changing between Mirror and Smart Full Incremental or Differential the older versions are deleted Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup to CD DVD or Blu ray 58 Backup4all 5 4 1 B
15. ini files from version 5 of Backup4all Import from version 4 imports ini files from version 4 of Backup4all Import from version 3 imports ini files from version 3 of Backup4all Import from version 2 imports ini files from version 2 of Backup4all Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 65 Explore View Layout Explore View B New backup Support B Open Backup B k By Open Backup From Backup4all Help d a U O a 7 Take full control of your backup Get help using Backup4all Tools About Backup4all Support Request Backup4all Version 5 0 Build xxx Sales et us know if you need help Copyright 2002 2012 Softland additional copyright e Options www backup4all com T Exit g Buy Now Registration information Buy Backup4all online Backup4all Professional Worldwide license Tools for working with Backup4all Key 100 2000 1000 00 p Options K Y Customize language display and other program settings Change product key Register online Check fortid Deactivate this product key Eck FOr poses k Our Projects Get the latest updates available for Backup4all Backup4all backup software www backup4all com novaPDF PDF creator www novapdf com Software112 software library www softwarel12 com e Help e Backup4all Help opens the Help file e Support Request starts a new email message that will be sent to the support team How to Order
16. 11 2 2012 11 11 2 2012 11 1 20 2010 2 11 2 2012 11 11 2 2012 11 11 7 2012 11 Normal priority __ lt Previous Next gt Cancel For the Choose filter files and restore any version restore type files and folders shown in the tree are calculated based on selected backup versions Files that have not been backed up in the selected backup versions or were filtered will not be shown in the tree Selecting all backup versions in the Choose filter files and restore any version restore type is the same as using the Choose filter files and restore the latest version type Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 234 Backup4all 5 feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland File Filtering 236 Backup4all 5 9 1 File Filtering Overview File filtering in Backup4all provides an intuitive way to define what files and folders to back up or restore Select Folders and Files for filtering The files can be filtered when added to backup On the What do you want to backup page from the Backup Wizard or Backup Properties gt Sources page each file and folder is shown in the tree with a checkbox in front of it If you uncheck it the file or
17. B Backup 64 Backup date 81 Backup list 73 Backup logs 125 Backup options Compression filter 260 File warnings 260 Retry 260 Show success 260 Show warning 260 Wait 260 Warn 260 Backup Properties destination 152 Backup Properties overview 150 Backup properties sources 179 Backup tags Delete tag 74 New tag 74 Rename tag 74 Backup to Amazon 39 Backup to Azure 38 Backup to Blu ray 58 Backup to CD 58 Backup to DVD 58 Backup to FTP 32 Backup to SFTP 36 Backup to USB drives 40 backup type 145 184 Backup types Differential backup 46 Full backup 46 Incremental backup 46 Mirror backup 46 Backup types in Backup4all 53 Backup versions 97 Backup wizard destination 133 135 136 137 139 140 142 Backup wizard general 150 Backup wizard name 133 Backup wizard overview 133 Backup wizard what to backup 143 Backup4all 8 Backup4all 2 127 Backup4all 3 127 Backup4all 4 127 Backup4all Configurations 150 Bandwidth limitation 163 168 173 176 Blank passwords 106 107 116 213 214 222 Blu eay 58 Blu ray 155 Builtin 59 Built in driver 155 Burner 59 C Calculate statistics 86 Cancel 64 Captions 254 Catalog 58 60 CD 58 155 CD drive 152 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Index 309 CD DVD Blu ray options Burning engine 270 Eject CD DVD Blue ray 270 Load CD DVD Blue ray 270 SPTD 270 SPTI 270 Change criteria 199 Change Icon 150 Changed files 81 Clean backup 1
18. Backup4all 5 Items between braces are a set of choices from which the user must choose only one e x cleans the backup Supports additional parameters e IE mm dd yyyy clean the backups older than the specified date e IS mm dd yyyy clean the backups newer then the specified date e OT n OTU D W M Y nis the number of days D weeks W months M or years Y e KD keep Differential backups e KF keep Full backups Tags Syntax bTagCleanup G tag_name Priority 1 2 3 4 Additional parameters can be used e IE mm dd yyyy clean the backups older than the specified date e IS mm dd yyyy clean the backups newer then the specified date e OT n OTU D W M Y nis the number of days D weeks W months M or years Y e KD keep Differential backups e KF keep Full backups The mirror backup jobs will be ignored when running a cleanup for a tag including mirror backup jobs Examples To clean all backup versions older than two weeks and keep the full and differential backups of the My Pictures backup job use bCleanup x My Pictures OT 2 OTU W KF KD Priority 2 To execute a cleanup for Samples tag bTagCleanup G Samples OT 2 OTU W Priority 2 Backup4all returns exit codes after each task execution backup independent test repair restore or cleanup As a general case if the action was successful the exit code is 0 otherwise is different Here are th
19. Besides normal password protection Backup4all also supports 128 bit 192 bit and 256 bit AES encryption These numbers reflect the encryption key size used to encrypt the data a higher key strenght provides stronger encryption Snapshots Mirror backup type makes an exact copy of selected files and folders copying NTFS permissions and alternate streams including empty folders too for an exact copy of the source Optionally for mirror backups you can choose to zip the backed up files individually Disk Spanning Automated support for splitting your backup between many removable disks or even on the same media You can specify the maximum size of the zip archives When performing a mirror backup and using disk spanning you can choose not to split the files This is an useful option because you can copy your music movies to CD DVD or Blu ray disc and not have them split up when the CD DVD or Blu ray disc is full Logs The operations performed by Backup4all are logged This allows you to see the status of performed operations backup test cleanup restore A backup job tag History view is available too which also lets you export the information as csv Command Line A command line version of this backup application is available too that lets you run different operations using parameters Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 14 Backup4all 5 1 5 Restore Wizard Restore backed up data step
20. Compression Advanced Save and run Removable If the current backup destination is not a removable drive you can change it by checking the Change destination to removable media option Destination Select from the drop down list the removable drive you want to use as backup destination You can type a folder name in the Folder field or you can click the Browse button to choose another folder where the backup will be stored In destination folder field you can use Environment Variables as Computername SystemDrive UserName etc Lock the destination to this removable drive When disconnecting and reconnecting a removable drive your computer may not assign it the same drive letter If the drive letter was changed the backup might fail because Backup4all is trying to backup to the same old drive letter which probably does not exist Use this option if you want Backup4all to detect the removable drive after its own serial number and automatically change the backup destination according with the new drive letter Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 159 7 3 5 You should not check this option if you use a rotation backup scheme with two or more removable hard drives By default this option is not checked Erase disk before writing When this option is checked the removable disk is erased before burning the backup files By default this option is not checked Volume
21. DATE 12 30 2011 Priority 2 To execute a restore for Samples tag bTagRestore G Samples Priority 2 Backup4all returns exit codes after each task execution backup independent test repair restore or cleanup As a general case if the action was successful the exit code is 0 otherwise is different Here are the possible exit codes e 0 action was successful e 1 action has not started parameter errors syntax errors other errors e 2 action finished with errors e 3 action was finished with warnings 4 5 independent test was finished with errors independent test was finished with warnings Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Cleanup Backup4all uses for each action a small application that runs independently from the main application They can be used to create batch files The command line parameters for cleanup action are described bellow Backup jobs Syntax bCleanup X job_name Priority 1 2 3 4 Formatting legend Italic Information that must be supplied by the user Bold Elements that the user must type exactly as shown Switches are preceded by slash Elements between square brackets are optional Vertical line separates possible choices Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 250
22. In the first step you can choose the destination the priority of the execution and customize the restore operation if you wish Where do you want to restore Use original location Choose another location Do not create drive letter folder How do you want to restore Restore the latest version of all files Restore all files as of _ Choose files and restore the latest version _ Choose filter files and restore the latest version Choose filter files and restore any version _ Restore excluded and deleted files C Preview files at the end of wizard y Normal priority lt Previous Cancel Where do you want to restore Use original location Copies the files from the zip backup into the original location If a file with the same name already exists a dialog will be shown prompting for an action before the restore can continue Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Restore Wizard 227 4 File overwrite New Backup Overwrite in 01 44 min _ Don t show this message type anymore _ Don t popup the notification window for this message type Go to job Change notification settings Apply default for all and close Choose another location Copies files from the zip backup to a different folder If selected you can choose a different folder to restore files from the backup Do not create drive letter folder If checked Backup4all will restore the file
23. It indicates the email that will be sent when the cleanup operation failed because of an error The default email is lt Default email gt but you can change this using the Open button If you press the Edit button E you can modify the selected email file except the default email Also there is the option to select lt No email gt if you don t want Backup4all to send an email if there were errors during the cleanup operation Customizing emails If you want to create a customized email to be sent on success warning error the email template will have to include special tags that Backup4all will recognize and replace according to the description note that the format of the tag must be lt tag_name gt e lt BACKUP_NAME gt will insert the name of the executed backup job e lt TAG_NAME gt will insert the name of the backup tag e lt SOURCES gt will insert the sources of the executed backup e lt DEST_DRIVE gt will insert the destination drive letter lt DEST_DRIVE_TYPE gt will insert the destination drive type lt DEST_FOLDER gt will insert the name of the destination folder lt DEST_CATALOG _FILE gt will insert the name of the catalog file created lt BACKUP_TYPE gt will insert the backup type that was performed Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 210 Backup4all 5 lt SCHED_NEXT_EXECUTIONS will insert the next scheduled execution lt SCHED_NEXT_TAG_EXECUTIO
24. Just right click on the backup version and e choose Restore Latest Version if you want to restore the version in the original location choose Restore Latest Version To if you want to restore the version in another location choose Test if you want to test that backup version choose View Backup Log if you want to open view that log with the selected log viewer Initially the default text editor is used File Tree The file tree content depends on the files from the selected backup version You can right click on the folders and files in the tree to open a menu that allows you to choose the following options e Restore if you want to restore the version in the original location Restore to if you want to restore the version in another location Open if you want to open view that version of the file with the associated Windows application View with Notepad if you want to open view that version of the file with Notepad Full expand to expand all the tree The file tree shows the file folder name bck no size last modified date attributes and status for each file in additional columns You can sort the files by simply clicking on the appropriate column header The files are sorted within their folders Except File Folder each column can be hidden if you right click on the column header and uncheck the names of the columns that you want to remove There are seven buttons on top of the file tree that help you show hide files depending on their s
25. Network Local hard drive EA Local Disk C v FTP server Folder Users Info Documents My Backup4all SFTP server Azure Amazon S3 Sources Filters Customize Type Smart Full Differential Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced Save and run Cancel Local hard drive Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 154 Backup4all 5 7 3 2 If the current backup destination is not a local hard drive you can change it by checking the Change destination to local hard drive option Destination In the Folder field by default it is the path to the My Backup4all 5 folder Users lt user name gt My Documents My Backup4all 5 You can click on the Browse button and select a location of your choice where the backup will be stored In destination folder field you can use Environment Variables as Computername SystemDrive UserName etc Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic External hard drive You can select an external hard drive as destination for backup General Destination yp Save backup to an external hard drive USB or Firewire Local hard drive e Bernal hard drive Pemet tard drvo CD DVD or Blu ray Change destination to external hard drive Removable Destination Network External hard
26. O Test Backup numbers O Repair Repair catalog only Cleanup Newer than 7 2 2013 Older than 7 2 2013 Older than 3 Months Do not delete full backups Do not delete differential backups Clear the destination folder O Restore Where to restore Original location Other location Do not create drive letter folder How to restore Restore the latest version of all files Restore all files as of 7 2 2013 Restore backup numbers Restore excluded and deleted files What to execute e Backup Type e Default executes the default backup type defined in the backup job s properties e Smart executes a smart backup no matter what the backup type defined in the backup job is e Full executes a full backup no matter what the backup type defined in the backup job is e Differential executes a differential backup no matter what the backup type defined in the backup job is e Incremental executes an incremental backup no matter what the backup type defined in the backup job is Clear backup before run If this is checked Backup4all will first delete the bkc file and all zip files associated with the Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 224 Backup4all 5 current backup job and after that execute the scheduled backup e Test you can schedule a test operation instead of a backup When Test is selected the 1 2 5 4 Backup Numbers box is displayed You can t
27. Restore 5 36 E Restore To 12 Ty S ype sea w O Linksf Open MSN Laa H Winde Expand All pant G History i 8 Bir Collapse All H de 2 15 4 Details Pane M Type to search backup jobs Filter No messages The Backup View consists of a Backup Version List on top and a File Tree at the bottom Backup Version List File No Status Added Added Added Added Added 2A 2 If a backup version is selected at the bottom of the view you can see the list of the files in that backup and their status before that backup Information provided for each version e Type Type of the Backup Each of the backup types is represented by a descriptive icon v Full Incremental e Differential Mirror Bck No Number of the backup File No Number of files in that backup Folder No Number of folders in that backup Comp Size Compressed size of the file version Backup Date Date and time when the backup was created Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 85 e Uncomp Size Uncompressed size of the file version e Label Label of the backup increment The backup version list can be sorted by clicking on the column headers The right click menu on the column header provides a handy way to show hide unnecessary columns except the Type column which is grayed out Backup4all provides an easy way to restore or test a backup version
28. This option can also be selected from the right click menu of the backup job Modify a Backup Job Configuration First you must select the backup job you wish to modify Then press the Properties button EJ from the application s toolbar This will open the Backup Properties window You can also change its configuration by choosing Properties from the right click menu of the backup job After the Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Getting Started 27 2 4 Properties window is opened go to the page with the settings you want to modify Delete a Backup Job Select the backup job you want to delete and select Delete Backup option from the Jobs tab Another possibility is to choose Delete CTRL Del from the right click menu of the backup job Files and folders from the source and destination will not be deleted by any of these operations Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic How to Restore from a Backup With Backup4all you can do the following restore operations e restore the latest version of all files e restore all files as they were on a specified date e filtered restore e restore all files from a folder e restore the latest version of a particular file e restore the latest version of multiple selected files e restore
29. e Backup view CTRL F2 e Statistics F3 Refresh F5 Execute backup F6 Restore F7 Pause CTRL F8 Stop CTRL S Cancel F8 k KOOCO Test F9 Scheduler F11 Show New Files CTRL 1 Show Unchanged Files CTRL 2 show Modified Files CTRL 3 Show Excluded Files CTRL 4 Show Deleted Files CTRL 5 Expand All CTRL 6 Collapse All CTRL 7 Fil lore Vi Jobs E menu F10 Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland New Backup Wizard New Backup Wizard 133 6 1 6 2 New Backup Wizard Overview Using the New Backup Wizard you can easily create a new backup job The steps in wizard must be followed in the given order If you want to create a new backup job using advanced options you can do that by pressing the Advanced mode button that will open the Backup Properties window All settings from the New Backup Wizard are included in the Backup Properties The New Backup Wizard will be used to create new backup jobs if the Use New Backup Wizard to create backup jobs option from the Other section in File gt Options gt Preferences is checked If that option is not checked the Backup Prop
30. file not indexed by the content indexing service Offline only NTFS content of the file is not immediately available This attribute indicates that the file data has been physically moved to an offline storage Reparse point only NTFS reparse points are used as building blocks by Microsoft and third parties to enhance NTFS file system behavior Sparse file only NTFS in a sparse file large ranges of zeroes may not require disk allocation Space for nonzero data will be allocated as needed as the file is written If you select more than one attribute Backup4all will consider the file for backup if any of the attributes selected is changed Legacy use archive bit If this is selected Backup4all will determine which files will be backed up by verifying if the archive bit attribute is set If the archive bit attribute for a file is not set that file will be ignored even if its size was modified for instance Our recommendation is to use the Criteria option since it s more accurate than using the archive bit alone Play sounds after backup Use this section to set sound notifications to be played when the backup is finished There are three types of sound notifications depending on the backup status success warning and error Play sounds If checked then success warning and error sounds will be played at the end of the backup By default this option is not checked On success It indicates the sound that will be played when t
31. information stored in text It includes 33 non printed control characters and 94 printed characters such as letters and punctuation e Auto according to the list of ASCII files defined in File gt Options gt FTP the files will be uploaded in ascii or binary mode depending on their extension By default binary mode is selected and it applies only to Mirror backup type That is useful if you have a Linux FTP server as backup destination and want to download the backed up files with another application which uses the Auto transfer mode Uploading the files to a Linux server in binary mode and downloading them in Auto mode causes the files to be modified Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 165 by adding a new empty line at the end of each file e Port In this field you have to enter the port number if different than the default FTP ports 21 e Destination folder Here you can enter the destination path if different than root e User name If this is a private FTP server no anonymous access allowed enter the user name for your account e Password In this field enter the password for the FTP server Bandwidth limitation In this section you can set different limitations for upload download speed e Limit upload speed if checked you can set a maximum upload speed for the FTP transfer e Limit download speed if checked you can set a maximum upload speed for the FTP transfer Adv
32. provides information about where and how to buy the application Options opens the Options window Check for Updates displays a window with the available updates e Options opens the Options window e Exit exits the application same as the keyboard shortcut Alt F4 Jobs The Jobs toolbar contains the most important Backup4all buttons which can be applied on backup jobs Manage this group includes the buttons necessarily to manage the backup jobs Jobs im Delete Backup F3 Destination Folder New Properties Refresh backup E By Duplicate Backup Scheduler mS Manage Tags Layout B Open Backup A Create Shortcut AN e New backup starts the New Backup Wizard e Properties opens a dialog to edit the backup job configuration e Open backup creates a new backup job from the opened bkc or ini file Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 66 Backup4all 5 e Open backup from creates a new backup job from the opened bkc or ini file and user can select to open the catalog from multiple locations as local hard drive network FTP SFTP Azure or Amazon S3 server Delete backup removes the current selected backup same as the toolbar button Delete or the keyboard shortcut Ctrl Del Duplicate backup duplicates the selected backup job same as pressing the keyboard shortcut Ctrl L Create Shortcut creates a shortcut to a backup job or tag for easy backup execu
33. 1 2 Backup Types in Backup4all sssssnnesnunnennunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nanmanna 53 Backup to CD DVD or Blu ray 58 Backup to CD DVD Of BIU ray ccccccsseeeesneeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeeeeeesaaeeeesneeeseessasaesaseeeeeeeesesnaeeaseeeneaees 58 Use Built in Drivers ssni aaa a a ea aa aaa eaaa baana a aaa odueuessdecceuventbeduectuneeds 59 Use Packet Witting swiss cnceceenccececc cc eeeeecene ce event ctenedennetnees ceteteeecvecetin ee vusengeeevecoueeresseteuerseseteecvenestueses 60 Writing to CD DVD or Blu ray CiSC ccsseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeenseeeeesaesaseaesnseeeeseneseseaneneeeeeneas 60 Other CD DVD Blu ray SettinS cccsccsseceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeesaeseseeeeneeeeeseaesaseeeeneeeeesnaesaseeeeeseees 61 Main Window 64 GOMMIMANS saaana aE csc cee cece cabal eee he scene eh oa vat E ace creas fect E E n 64 GOING State ez inenen onransa nace tes ced suteuee SE a eer Paaa a EE eNA o a Eda raTa AE aee RE ENa u ESEE 71 Backup List aiiai ni a ANEAN AA NES AENEAN EA EEA E EAE ANS 73 Manage Backup TaQ5S cccesssecceeeseeeeeeensneeeeenseeeeeeenseeeeeegseeeeeenseeaeeeenseaeeeseaseeeeesaseeneeeenseeeenensnennenes 74 Create Shor OUE aaa rar eaa aa dened is apaan daaa cvs aaa aa aaraa cde AE A Aar PaE peri Sbacabecd if edecceaddaceevtdedeceedesdaers 76 Explora VIW aaan a x cucu ccestwauucussvacuces es caqueredsuneteee auegees svuncuuet 81 Backup Viewsi 2ccccc anann cec
34. 34 17 PM Starting cleanup on New Bac 7 2 2013 3 34 17 PM Name Internet Explorer Favo 7 2 2013 3 34 17 PM Deleting backup number 3 Logged operations Cleanup Shows the backup numbers that are deleted and logs the result of the operation Calculate statistics logging Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 125 E Edit Format View Help 7 2 2013 3 35 35 PM Backup4all 5 0 151 7 2 2013 3 35 35 PM Operating system Windows 8 7 2 2013 3 35 36 PM Calculate backup type to execute 7 2 2013 3 35 36 PM Backup type to run is Incremental Changes since last backup Files New Unchanged 23 Modified Excluded Folders New Unchanged 5 Modified Excluded Logged operations Calculate statistics Shows the number of files folders modified since the last backup and also the number of files folders to be backed up according with the selected backup type Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 5 17 History The History window can be open from the left side column by pressing the History button Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 126 Backup4all 5 veh i Date lt ALL gt L i Refresh tE y A Q0 eBo Restore Success Warning Error W e P View
35. 5 File locations BkcFiles 258 Catalog 258 Destination 258 IniFiles 258 Initialization 258 Log 258 Temporary 258 File tree 81 File version list 81 File versions 47 49 50 51 Backup number 229 Backup time 229 Label 229 Total size 229 Type 229 Files in backup 86 Filter By attribute 237 By date 237 Byname 237 By size 237 Directories 237 Files 237 Folders 237 Filter backup Customize filter 180 Exclude files 180 Include files 180 Main filter 180 Filter restore Customize filter 231 Exclude files 231 Include files 231 Main filter 231 Finalizing CD DVD 59 Firewall 163 FireWire 40 154 269 flash 157 floppy 157 Floppy drive 152 Folder filtering 236 FTP 133 137 152 161 Hammering 32 Portnumber 32 Proxy server 32 Remote location 32 Retry times 32 SSL 32 XCRC 32 FTP options Hostname 272 281 284 Password 272 281 284 Port 272 281 284 Retry 272 281 284 Username 272 281 284 Wait 272 281 284 Full 46 184 Full backup 47 49 145 188 Fullerase 119 Gc General options Align caption 253 Appearance 253 Background color 253 Blank passwords 253 Captions 253 Context menu 253 Daylight saving 253 Explorer icons 253 Hidden files 253 Hide empty folders 253 Hint 253 Iconsize 253 Insecure passwords 253 Measurement 253 Sort backups 253 Toolbar 253 Getting Started Backup 71 New 71 Open 71 Restore 71 Group 150 By Hard disk drive 152 Hide empty folders 81 High priority 97 Highest p
36. Admin Run only if the user is logged on Run whether the user is logged on or not At system shutdown Priority Priority Notifications Force all notifications to timeout Cancel Run e Job This option allows you to schedule a backup job from the ones already defined You can choose the backup job to execute from the drop down list e Tag This allows you to schedule a tag In the drop down list select a tag to execute but you can t select an action Each backup job containing the tag will perform the action you select e All jobs This allows you to run all backup jobs The backup jobs will be executed one after another e One Touch Backup If this is selected the scheduled task will run the backup using settings from File gt Options gt Backup on demand If the option Enable One Touch Backup support is not enabled the scheduled task will not run Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 107 5 13 2 Execute Show main application Use this option if you want the main application window to be shown when the scheduled task is executed By default this option is unchecked and the scheduled tasks will run in background Close after run If this option is checked Backup4all will be closed after the task is executed Scheduler With Windows scheduler e Run only if the user is logged on the task will run under the specified user account only if ther
37. Amazon S3 When defining a new backup job using the New Backup Wizard select the Amazon option in the d estination section 1st page of the wizard If you already have a backup job defined and want to change the destination to Amazon S3 select that backup job open the Properties window Ctrl P go to the Destination page and select Amazon S3 After that go to Amazon S3 page and specify an existing Amazon S3 configuration or create a new one From the Use existing configuration select an already defined Amazon S3 configuration given that you added one in the File gt Options gt Amazon S3 window The description of the selected Amazon S3 configuration will be listed bellow You can change the defined settings by selecting the Custom configuration option and pressing the Edit configuration button Here you can modify the data in the fields and press OK to save However if you do changes it is recommended to use the Test Amazon S3 connection button to see if the Amazon S3 settings are correct Once you press the OK button Backup4all will try to connect to the Amazon S3 server to see if a backup catalog already exists on the destination If the Amazon S3 destination is not available a Cannot connect to the Amazon S3 server message is displayed in the status bar bottom of the main window In the File gt Options gt Backup window you can set the number of retries and the time between the retries when the Amazon S3 server is unavailable th
38. Applies only to mirror Port 21 Destination folder backup User name username Password Set password Password protected Bandwidth limitation Upload speed 200 Download speed 200 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 164 Backup4all 5 Advanced SSL encryption No SSL v v Use passive mode for transfers like WWW browsers Use extended passive mode Y Use XCRC when testing if available v Resume uploads downloads if available v Limit file size to 2027 MB v Larger files will be split Timeout seconds 15 Firewall Proxy type None v et 5 General Existing configuration If you want to add a new FTP location the lt New gt option should be selected To edit an existing FTP location select it from the drop down list All fields will be filled with the values of the selected FTP FTP server e Server name or IP In this field you have to enter the name or IP address for the FTP server e Transfer mode Here you can select the transfer mode Binary ASCII or Auto e Binary it refers to transferring files as a binary stream of data The binary mode transmits the raw bytes of the file being transferred In this way the file is transferred in its exact original form ASCII it stands for American Standard Code for Information Interchange and is a type of character encoding based on the English language used on devices that handle
39. Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 32 Backup4all 5 2 8 Refresh Add Delete Properti Drag a column header here to group by that column or aan User and password Enabled Job type Scheduler Runin Action Backup Type Task file sems T Job Windows Background Backup Default b4a_New Backup The task is ready to run at its n Options Show warnings and errors Abort backup when source drives are not available Ask for user input when backup cannot continue In order to add a new scheduled backup press the Add button and select the needed configuration in the newly opened window On the General page of the scheduler you can select if the main application interface will be shown or not After defining the scheduled backup you must set its run time from the When page of the scheduler If you skip this step the default Windows value will be used current time Use the Windows Help in order to find out more information about scheduling a task using the Task Scheduler The last step is to select the action to be executed By default the backup action is selected but you can also schedule a test repair cleanup or restore action Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic How to Backup to FTP Ba
40. Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 150 Backup4all 5 7 1 7 2 Backup Properties Overview The Backup Properties window can be used to create new backup jobs in the advanced mode or to edit an existing backup job By default the New Backup Wizard will be used to create new backup jobs To use the Backup Properties when creating new jobs uncheck the Use New Backup Wizard to create backup jobs option from the Other section in File gt Options gt Preferences Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic General The General page defines the appearance of the backup job in the backup list r Description of the backup job lt 3 Destination Local hard drive n General External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Name New Backup Tag Removable Network FTP server SFTP server Azure Amazon S3 Sources aa Description Filters Customize Type Smart Icon Full Job icon Change icon Differential a ae Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced Save and run Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 151 General Name Enter the name of the backup job This name will appear in the backup list near the chosen picture This fi
41. Backup4all for the backup General s Destination a What do you want to backup Local hard drive External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Selection of files and folders v Removable File Folder Size Modified Attributes S M O CAUsers Info Pictures 4 E 11 bmp 1 85MB 7 4 2013 11 49 45 FTP server E 22 bmp 1 85MB 7 4 2013 11 49 50 SFTP server E 55 bmp 1 85MB 7 4 2013 11 49 54 E 77 bmp 1 85MB 7 4 2013 11 49 58 Ana E 99 bmp 1 85MB 7 4 2013 11 50 03 Amazon 53 3 desktop ini 504 bytes 7 4 2013 8 10 13 AM E Thumbs db 18KB 7 4 2013 11 50 04 Network Filters Customize Type Smart Full Differential Incremental Mirror Compression Add folder Add file temove Check all Uncheck all Advanced Save and run Cancel You can e add a whole folder by pressing the Add folder button e add one or several files by pressing the Add files button e remove any file or folder by selecting it and pressing the Remove button exclude subdirectories and files from backup by un checking the thickbox select all files and folders by pressing the Check all button unselect all files and folders by pressing the Uncheck all button At least one source must be added to the backup job If the source drive is missing when the network is disconnected for instance or CD DVD Blu ray is missing a warning message is shown containing the list
42. File Folder C Users Info Desktop Sources M aaa bbb e MO cee M ddd E 01 bc 02 doc 229 Checkall Uncheck alll y Normal priority lt Previous Net gt Finish You can uncheck the files you don t want to restore By default all files are checked Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 8 3 To what date do you want to restore This is the third step of the Restore Wizard if the Choose filter files and restore any version option was chosen Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 230 Backup4all 5 To what date do you want to restore Restore as of 7 5 2013 By Apply Type Backup date Backup No Comp Size Uncomp size f 7 5 2013 1 54 0 3 31 12 KB 127 49 KB 7 5 2013 12 58 2 31 12KB 127 49 KB 7 5 2013 12 54 1 31 12KB 127 49 KB Normal priority lt Previous Next gt Restore as of This option allows you to restore your files and folders to a specified date Just select the data press Apply and then press Finish The purpose of this step is to let you select versions to restore Use left mouse clicks together with SHIFT and or CTRL keys to select several backup numbers to restore The most recent version of a file in t
43. For an example of tag usage open one of the 5 default emails The emails are stored in text format in application s directory i e C Program Files Softland Backup4all 5 with the following filenames SuccessFullEmail txt WarningFullEmail txt ErrorFullEmail txt for backup emails TestSuccessFullEmail txt and TestErrorFullEmail txt for test emails The subject line of the email sent can be customized too by adding the following line at the beginning of the customized file that will be used by Backup4all as an email lt Subject of the email gt Here is an example of a customized email that can be sent when a cleanup operation is successful note that the first line of this will be used as the subject line of the email lt Cleanup for lt 4BACKUP_NAME gt finished successfully at lt CLEANUP_END_TIME gt gt Cleanup for backup job lt BACKUP_NAME gt at lt CLEANUP_START_TIME gt finished successfully See log file lt LAST_LOG_NAME gt for more information Removed backups lt REMOVED_VERSIONS gt Removed version details lt CLEANUP_SUMMARY gt Total removed file size lt PROCESSED_SIZE gt Free space on destination lt REMAINING_DISC_SPACE gt Cleanup started at lt CLEANUP_START_TIME gt Cleanup finished at lt CLEANUP_END_TIME gt Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 7 10 Scheduler Scheduler General Destination Local hard drive Externa
44. Just select in the Restricted to section the maximum values you want to allow the log folder to grow to 6 From the Log Viewer section you can change the program to open the log files From the drop down list you can select Notepad or Wordpad You can also browse the computer to select another text editor 7 From the log file extension list you can select the extension of the generated log file log or txt 8 Click OK to close the window and save the changes Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Types 46 Backup4all 5 3 1 Backup Types Backup Types Backup4all stores a summary snapshot of the file information into a backup catalog file bkc each time a backup is executed For every file backed up the snapshot contains the file name size and attributes as well as the date and time of creation latest modification and latest access Legacy backup applications inspect each file s archive flag to identify which files have been changed Backup4all will not interfere with any other backup software because it does not read or change the archive flag it uses the catalog file to decide which files have to be backed up and which not Backup4all implements the fundamental backup ty
45. Progress View View backup statistics NEW Group backup configurations using tags NEW Access application according to system privileges Lock program interface with a password Show Getting Started window Show versions in Explore View Search as you type for backup jobs tags in backup list History window with backup restore test cleanup logs Show available space in destination on Statistics View Create desktop shortcut to backup jobs and backup tags Predefined backups Microsoft Outlook backup plugin NEW Quick access toolbar CLG BG BK KRIK LCL LKR LLG CLK KG LIIS G amp G IIIS GLK KK KKK GLK SKF LIIL A amp amp GLK GLK KK KKK GLK SKSGE 88GB G amp G GLK GLK KKK KKB CLK SSK Visualization modes for application startup Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 16 Backup4all 5 Automatic updates Multi language support MSI setup for automatic deployment Backup KKK S86 8 amp 6 86 NEW Block backup true incremental Backup open files locked or in use New Backup Wizard NEW Stop cancel all backup jobs NEW Password store management Select individual files and folders to be backed up Inclusion and exclusion filters for files and folders Create and use general predefined filters Possibility to Pause Resume or Stop the backup Override filters NEW Suspend application NEW Run missed schedules AES encryption 128 bit 192 bit and 256 bit Email notifications o
46. Remove button exclude subdirectories and files from backup by un checking the thickbox You must add at least one file or directory in order to continue with the next step of the wizard During backup if the source drive is missing when the network is disconnected for instance or CD DVD Blu ray is missing a warning message is shown containing the list of missing drives The user can choose Abort to stop the backup process Retry to check the drive again Ignore to mark the source folder as deleted and continue with the next sources If the backup is started by the scheduler then the system will try to access the sources for as many times as set in the File gt Options gt Backup window When all retries are done with no success the backup will abort If you have filters defined in Tools gt Options gt Filters they will be listed in the Filters list You can use this filters to customize the backup sources selection All filters listed are include filters Do not select any filter if you want to backup all files Filters list In the right side of the New Backup Wizard window there is the Filters list You can use these filters Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland New Backup Wizard 145 6 4 to customize the file selection The filters are defined in File gt Options gt Filters Only the filters that have Show filter in New Backup Wizard option set are shown Filters can be of type includ
47. SFTP SSH File Transfer Protocol connection This is also practical backup destination because the backed up data can be easily accessed from any other computer with an Internet connection Defining SFTP configuration Before using SFTP as a destination for backing up you should define a new SFTP configuration using the File gt Options gt SFTP window Once defined you will be able to apply this SFTP configuration to individual backup jobs Press the Add button once in File gt Options gt SFTP to add a new SFTP connection The New SFTP configuration name will appear in the list and you can enter the other settings for this connection e Configuration name Enter here an arbitrary name for the connection e Server name or IP In this field you have to enter the name or IP address for the SFTP server e Port In this field you have to enter the port number if different than the default SFTP ports 22 e Destination folder Here you can enter the destination path if different than root e User name If this is a private SFTP server no anonymous access allowed enter the user name for your account e Password In this field enter the password for the SFTP server In the When SFTP server is not ready section you can enter the number of attempts and time between those attempts to connect to the SFTP server By default if the SFTP server is not Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Getting Started 37 re
48. SFTP connection button to see if the SFTP settings are correct Once you press the OK button Backup4all will try to connect to the SFTP server to see if a backup catalog already exists on the destination If the SFTP destination is not available a Cannot connect to the SFTP server message is displayed in the status bar bottom of the main window In the File gt Options gt Backup window you can set the number of retries and the time between the retries when the SFTP server is unavailable the When destination not ready section Recommendations for backing up to SFTP 1 After each change to the SFTP configuration be sure to use the Test function 2 Most SFTP sites have policies against hammering trying repeatedly to connect to an unavailable SFTP server with little or no time between connection attempts Thus they require SFTP clients to set retry times at specific intervals commonly at least 120 seconds between each attempt to connect Most SFTP sites can also monitor for devices that hammer and once detected the server will ban access to the offending IP address either permanently or for a limited amount of time Thus when you set the retry times intervals in File gt Options gt SFTP you should use 60 seconds or more 3 If you backup important data to a remote location using SFTP encrypt the zip files for increased security In this case even if another person manages to gain unauthorized access to the SFTP your files will still b
49. Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic CD DVD or Blu ray The CD DVD or Blu ray page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item contains the settings of the CD DVD or Blu ray burners Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 271 General s bay Control the CD DVD Blu ray burner Preferences Startup Application folders a Use SCSI Pass Through Direct layer SPTD Backup 7 Use native Win32 interface SPT Filters Logs and history Other Backup on demand _ Load CD DVD or Blu ray before backup _ Eject CD DVD or Blu ray after backup Azure Amazon S3 Email Updates Notifications Passwords Engine Use SCSI Pass Through Direct Layer SPTD Selected by default Backup4all uses this internal burning engine to write CD DVD HD DVD or Blu ray discs SPTD is a new method of access to storage devices and has the ability to provide direct control of devices without risk of compromising it by some malicious 3rd party filter drivers or other rootkit applications SPTD is currently supported only on Microsoft OS Windows 2000 and above SPTD similar to other access layers is not removed from your system after Backup4all uninstall in order not to disrupt other applications that may
50. T SESA AES 176 soroll ao c1 eee EESLIINI IETT EATE EA AATTEET 179 e E E E EEEE E E E E EEE 180 CUSTOMIZE NESE EAEE A EEE AEEA EEE ETELA RENTENE EEEE 181 O Jyp ia A T T EAE 184 Smat r raa aa r r a a aa araar a an eE Eo arai poetna 186 Full 188 BIALE aA ME ENE EEE EEA A AE AEEA E EAEE E ANA E NE EEE E EE EEEE 188 area a e E EEEE EAE S AOT O E OE E E EE E N E EE 190 Miror sescveniecepetueceecdecuseuscuiegecadetusadshuan ca teseusneeuceendueetcvewenwannvavoussbycavJavkusdeussedeuenntekeeudenecudclaeudecwesseGucsvabnsbyaevorsees 191 TZ COMPPOSSION estan ste sce A heen cocks dace Settc E E E E E E 195 GO AOVANGEG sccnssasoreececrssrsacaanateencaaccanscarsneteavensaeecaenaesvecseatectace E E E E A E ATT 199 9 Emal i O e aa a aa a aaa aa aa sseidadnctetetesaeleseuudassenee 205 10 Scheduler cocccciscieciiiiniaccetieccnctascadseccassatucudaunuansiadsuscuuaauuuccdvaautecvsdsduacvadddacuecdeasladedsdaucuccassduuadsusads 211 er A Se EENE E EEEN BE ENESE LEEENA ENEE ENS EEO LLET EEEE EAN EEEE 213 Wheel Oa ae e A aaea iaraa i La a ar dana aeta a apaa aede a 214 Mat OO a a cane cee aee celal va a A oree ar aa eefe deae A Ea vent edaran aoaeiaa 222 Part VIII Restore Wizard 226 T Where nd DOWwto teSt le iiciin eaaa naaa aaaea ea aaa aaa adaa akadai 226 2 What do you want tO reStOre sssssssesnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 228 3 To what date do you want tO reStOre sssssnsesnnnnen
51. There are two ways to open a backup job in Backup4all e You can open the backup catalog bkc or ini file using the Open Backup command from Files menu You just need to browse your computer and indicate the catalog or ini file location T E Desktop v Search Desktop Organize v New folder A 4 Ft Favorites j Computer E Desktop i System Folder Network System Folder T i Recent places on v w e You can open the backup catalog bkc or ini file using the Open Backup From command from Files menu This option is recommended to be used if the catalog is located on a network location or on an FTP SFTP Azure Amazon S3 server but can also be used for local hard drives Open backup from a local hard drive Use this page if the catalog is on a local hard drive Browse your computer and indicate the folder containing the catalog s or ini file s Press Show to display the folders and selected file types bkc or ini Press Scan to display a list of only bkc ini files from all folders and subfolders in that location Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 92 Backup4all 5 Network FTP server SFTP server Azure storage Amazon S3 storage Cy Open backup from local hard drive Folder C Users Admin Desktop bke v Show Folders Files No items match your search Modified Open backup from a network d
52. User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 240 Backup4all 5 e gt date and time greater than or equal to fixed or relative date e lt date and time less than fixed or relative date e gt date and time greater than fixed or relative date e in interval date and time in a particular time interval between the Start date and End date File size This section provides the possibility to build restrictions based on the file size To enable the options in this section check the Filter by size option You can enter a file size in the Size field and select a measurement Unit The filter will compare the file size on disk with the size you enter using the comparison filters you selected e lt gt file size on disk not equal to the value in the Size field e lt file size on disk less than or equal to the value in the Size field e gt file size on disk greater than or equal to the value in the Size field e lt file size on disk less than the value in the Size field e gt file size on disk greater than the value in the Size field Note Filters on files and filters on folders must be created individually If you use a file and a folder filter condition in the same filter files will be filtered only if both filter conditions were met Examples e If you use a single filter for jog files and Temp folder only the jpg files from Temp folder will be filtered If you use separate filters for files and folders all jp
53. View with Notepad Compare with Source as Type to search backup jobs Compare Versions Select columns Beside files folder information is also added to backup so a restore process can recreate the original folder structure Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic How to Test a Backup With Backup4all you can e test one or more versions of a backup you can select any version for testing e automatically test latest version of a backup at each backup job execution To test a selection or all the versions for the selected backup job open the Test Backup window by pressing the Test button L from the application s toolbar or using the keyboard shortcut F9 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Getting Started 29 Test backup job y Backup numbers Select the backup numbers you want to test from the following list Type Backup date Backup No FileNo Folder Comp Si Uncomp size f 7 1 2013 2 37 4 23 6 39KB 3 62 KB 7 1 2013 1 42 5 23 6 39KB 3 62 KB 7 1 2013 1 42 4 23 6 39KB 3 62 KB 7 1 2013 1 41 4 23 6 39KB 3 62 KB 7 1 2013 1 40 5 23 6 39KB 3 62 KB 7 1 2013 1 31 1 23 6 39KB 3 62 KB Test process priority Normal priority Cancel In the test window select the backup
54. You can change the defined settings by selecting the Custom configuration option and pressing the Edit configuration button Here you can modify the data in the fields and press OK to save However if you do changes it is recommended to use the Test FTP connection button to see if the FTP settings are correct Once you press the OK button Backup4all will try to connect to the FTP server to see if a backup catalog already exists on the destination If the FTP destination is not available a Cannot connect to the FTP server message is displayed in the status bar bottom of the main window Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 34 Backup4all 5 2 8 1 In the File gt Options gt Backup window you can set the number of retries and the time between the retries when the FTP server is unavailable the When destination not ready section By default the FTP transfer mode used by Backup4all for Mirror backups is Binary You can change it and use ASCII or Auto mode The list of ASCII file types can be found in File gt Options gt FTP Recommendations for backing up to FTP 1 After each change to the FTP configuration be sure to use the Test function 2 Most FTP sites have policies against hammering trying repeatedly to connect to an unavailable FTP server with little or no time between connection attempts Thus they require FTP clients to set retry times at specific intervals commonly at least 120 seconds bet
55. a new Amazon configuration using the File gt Options gt Amazon 3 window Once defined you will be able to apply this Amazon S3 configuration to individual backup jobs Press the Add button once in File gt Options gt Amazon S3 to add a new Amazon connection The New SFTP configuration name will appear in the list and you can enter the other settings for this connection e Configuration name Enter here an arbitrary name for the connection e Access Key ID In this field you have to enter the key for your Amazon account Secret Access Key In this field you have to enter the secret key for your account Bucket Here you have to enter the name of the bucket Folder If you want to use a specific folder type here its name In the When Amazon S3 server is not ready section you can enter the number of attempts and time between those attempts to connect to the Amazon S3 server By default if the Amazon S3 server is not reachable Backup4all will try 3 times at a 5 seconds delay before aborting the backup You can Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 40 Backup4all 5 2 12 increase or decrease these values using the Retry and wait fields Once you have finished defining the connection press the Test button to check if the Amazon S3 details you have entered are correct If the test was successful The Amazon S3 connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Setting the destination to
56. account is ComputerName User or DomainName User Make sure you enter a valid password for the user account Select ini files to import When the Import window is opened a list with all the ini files found from a previous version is displayed and you can check the ones that you want to import in the backup list of the new version For your convenience you can use the Uncheck all or Check all options if you have lots of ini files and want to deselect select them all at once Note that the backup jobs will be actually moved into the latest version thus you will not be able to use them in the previous version The selected backup jobs will be moved into Backup4all 5 and you will not be able to use them in Backup4all Professional 4 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 129 5 19 There are three main columns in the display list e Import if the checkbox is marked the backup job will be imported e Name it displays the name of the backup job as it was defined in the previous version e Scheduled it shows if the respective backup job was a scheduled backup or not e Group shows the tag name the backup job belonged to Note the old backup groups will be now converted to tags in order to keep them organized Scheduler If the backup jobs were scheduled to run in the previous version when importing the scheduled tasks you will be asked to type the password for your curre
57. any other computer with an Internet connection Select the Amazon option from the Where do you want to save your backup section to be able to configure the backup to Amazon Name your backup Backup name New Backup Where do you want to save your backup Local O Network OFP O SFTP Use configuration My Amazon 3 account Access key ID Secret Access Key lt key is set gt Bucket backup bucket Folder backup Advanced mode Previous ve Cancel Use configuration You can select an already defined Amazon configuration given that you added one in the File gt Options gt Amazon window All the fields will be filled with the information from the configuration file If no configuration was previously defined you will have to enter the other details Access key ID Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland New Backup Wizard 143 In this field you have to enter the access key ID for your Amazon account Secret Access key Type here the secret access key for your account Bucket Type the bucket name you want to use as backup destination Folder Enter a folder name where the backup files will be stored on Amazon If the folder does not exist a new one is created with that name If that field is left blank Backup4all will automatically create a folder using the name of the backup job and place the backup files in there By pressing the Test button you can check to see if the se
58. are correct a test email should arrive in your specified email account Email addresses From Enter the sender s email address If you enter a wrong email address the email notification will not be sent This field is mandatory Reply To Optionally you can specify a different reply email address If no value is entered the From email will be used Authentication Server requires authentication If checked the SMTP server uses authentication and you will need to supply a user name and a password By default this option is not checked User name Enter the user name to be used when authenticating on the SMTP server Password Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 288 Backup4all 5 11 15 Enter the password to be used when authenticating on the SMTP server Dial up connection In this group you can set how the program should handle dial up connections The available options are Do not start Automatically start up Manually start up Do not start If selected email notifications are sent only if your computer is already connected to the Internet If you have a connection but you are not connected the program will not dial for you Automatically start up If selected and you are not connected to the Internet the program attempts to make the connection for you automatically Manually start up If selected and you are not connected to the Internet the program asks you if it should connect Y
59. are locked If the destination is on a removable disk CD DVD or Blu ray disc floppy disc and you have run the backup job the catalog and the subdirectory in destination are already created and they will not be changed If the backup job has not been run yet then the catalog and the subdirectory will be created with a name similar to the backup job at first backup run Where do you want to save your backup User can select one of the available destinations e Local hard disk drive floppy drive zip drive CD DVD Blu ray drive USB drive mapped Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland New Backup Wizard 135 network drive e Network UNC network drive e FTP remote FTP locations e SFTP remote SFTP locations e Azure remote Azure location e Amazon remote Amazon location Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 6 2 1 Local You can use a valid local destination for your backup hard disk drives floppy disk drives zip drives CD DVD or Blu ray drives USB drives or other removable media The Local option is selected by default when you define a new backup From the Drive list you can select either one of your hard disk partitions mapped network drives the floppy disk CD DVD Blu ray drive or other removable drive By default the f
60. backup is the starting point for all other backups and contains all the data in the folders and files that are selected to be backed up Because the full backup stores all files and folders frequent full backups result in faster and simpler restore operations This backup type is slow on large volumes of data so it is recommended to be done periodically each Week Month and in between to use other backup types like Incremental or Differential The advantage is that you only need the result of one backup execution to make a full restore General A Destination Make full backup Local hard drive Full External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray v Select Full as the default backup type Removable Network FTP server SFTP server Azure Amazon S3 Sources Filters Customize Type Smart Sr Differential Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced Save and run Cancel Full If the Full type is not your default backup type you can check the Select Full as the default backup type option Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Differential A differential backup contains all files that have changed since the last full backup The advantage of a differential backup is that it shortens restore time compared to a full backup or an incremental backup However if
61. backup jobs Default type exclude Passwords Filter name C Enable Add Edit Delete ooo Enable Add Edit Delete Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 264 Backup4all 5 File attributes Enable Custom Read Only FAT NTFS A Archived FAT NTFS Hidden FAT NTFS System FAT NTFS Compressed only NTFS v File dates _ Enable date modified today 7 5 2013 0 00 00 7 5 2013 0 00 00 File size Enable lt 50 MB Settings _ Show filter in New Backup Wizard _ Automatically add filter to new backup jobs Include filter Exclude filter General Filter name Type a name for the filter to be recognized when you want to use it later File name Enabling this will allow defining filters based on file name pattern Press Add and select an existing file extension from the Filter combo doc pdf zip etc If the extension does not exist in the combo just type it in and press OK You can use the Edit or Delete buttons to modify remove the file name filters defined File name patterns can include e it matches one or more letters For example a doc matches all files that start with a and have doc extension e it matches only one letter For example a do matches all files that start with a and have any extension composed of three letters the first two being do Backup4all 5 User Man
62. button to see if the destination is reachable and that you have sufficient rights to access it The network connection was tested successfully pop up message means that the network destination was accessible In case of insufficient rights the following error message will appear Network connection error Access is denied In this case you have to either make sure that the entered username and password values are correct or contact the network administrator to obtain the necessary rights If the destination is missing when the network is disconnected an error message is shown Backup4all 4 l Error running backup job New Backup from Group 01 group Cannot create destination directory Backup Server PC1 New Backup The filename directory name or volume label syntax is incorrect Retry to create directory or cancel backup Retry Cancel The user can choose Cancel to stop the backup process or Retry to check the network connection again If the scheduler starts the backup then the system will retry as many times as set in the File gt Options gt Backup window and if still is not possible to access the network destination it will abort the backup process Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic FTP Backup4all supports backin
63. by step Allows you to choose the version of files which will be restored and filter them to restore only the needed versions file versioning applies to full differential and incremental backups only You can quickly restore the latest version of a file folder as well as restoring versions of files backed up at a specific date Compatibility You can restore data using any standard zip software Backup4all gives you this way more flexibility if you need to restore data on a different computer if the backup was created using independent splits see this section on how to restore correctly using 3rd party zip software One touch backup Some USB enclosures have a button to start the execution of an associated program If you have such a device you can configure Backup4all to execute a backup job or a backup tag when this button is pressed works only with certain USB enclosures Summary Text description of the full setup for each backup job that allows you to easily review the information regarding the backup Program security Backup4all offers an option to lock its interface so that when it starts you will need to provide a password in order to unlock it and be able to make changes to its settings Test backup The application tests the backups using CRC32 This ensures that the files have been backed up properly and the backup is safe You can also test the backup integrity at a later time from Backup4all s main menu When backing up t
64. cannot provide protection from individuals with access to specialized password recovery tools Its advantage over AES encryption is the compatibility with all third party zip applications Set password After you press this button a windows with the following fields will appear e New password Manually enter the password you want to use for your zip files in this field Your password is less than 8 characters long This is not secure enough Do you want to continue Do not show this message again e Confirm new password Re enter the password in this field to avoid typing errors e Old password This field is enabled only when the backup job already has a password You can change the password only if you enter the old one in this field This way only the owner of the backup will be allowed to change the password The system makes it possible to set different passwords for the same backup job so the backup may contain zip files with different passwords Obfuscate file names in zip Using this option all file names will be obfuscated and they will have in zip new names as numbers This way you will get in destination a zip file with the source real names changed in order to get a higher protection Normally in zip file only the file content is protected but anyone can see the name of the files When the obfuscate option is used even if the real names of the files in zip are replaced with numbers you can still restore the files with the
65. connect to the SFTP server By default if the SFTP server is not reachable Backup4all will try 3 times at a 5 seconds delay before aborting the backup You can increase or decrease these values using the Retry and wait fields Once you have finished defining the connection press the Test button to check if the Azure details you have entered are correct If the test was successful The Azure connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Setting the destination to Azure When defining a new backup job using the New Backup Wizard select the Azure option in the d estination section 1st page of the wizard If you already have a backup job defined and want to change the destination to Azure select that backup job open the Properties window Ctrl P go to the Destination page and select Azure After that go to Azure page and specify an existing Azure configuration or create a new one From the Use existing configuration select an already defined Azure configuration given that you added one in the File gt Options gt Azure window The description of the selected Azure configuration will be listed bellow Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Getting Started 39 2 11 You can change the defined settings by selecting the Custom configuration option and pressing the Edit configuration button Here you can modify the data in the fields and press OK to save However if you do changes it is rec
66. differential backup types these counters are calculated based on the changes since the last full backup For the incremental backup type the counts are based on the changes since the last backup differential full or incremental New files folders The number of new files folders that will be added to backup For mirror backup with the Fast mirror option unchecked the new files folders counter equals the total number of files folders Unchanged files folders Shows the number of unchanged files folders to be added to backup For differential incremental and mirror backup with Fast mirror option unchecked this number will always be 0 Modified files folders Shows the number of modified files folders to be added to backup For mirror backup with the Fast mirror option unchecked this number will always be 0 Excluded files folders Shows the number of excluded files folders which will be removed from the backup Changes since last backup Counts the changes since the last backup regardless of the backup settings New files folders Shows the number of new files folders since last backup Unchanged files folders Shows the number of unchanged files folders since last backup Modified files folders Shows the number of modified files folders since last backup Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 89 5 9 Excluded files folders Shows the number of excluded files folders A file fold
67. double clicked e Do not delete full backups if this is checked the full backups will be kept even if they fall into the range of files filtered for deletion e Do not delete differential backups if this is checked the differential backups will be kept even if they fall into the range of files filtered for deletion e Clear the destination folder deletes any files and folders inside the destination folder even if they are not related to the backup job e Restore you can create a shortcut to restore a backup job tag or all jobs e Where to restore select the location for restore You can use the original location or you can specify another location If you use another location for restore you can avoid the creation of a drive letter folder by checking the Do not create drive letter folder option e How to restore you can restore the latest version of the files restore all files as of a Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 81 specific date or restore some backup numbers If you want to also restore excluded and deleted files you must check the Restore excluded and deleted files option Once you have selected the Action to be performed and the backup job tag to run press OK to create the shortcut A window will prompt you to select a name for your shortcut and its destination Once that s completed the shortcut will be placed in the selected destination Note Some of the features m
68. e lt file size on disk less than the value in the Size field e gt file size on disk greater than the value in the Size field Settings Show filter in the New Backup Wizard If checked the current filter can be selected from the Filters list in New Backup Wizard Automatically add filter to new backup jobs If checked the current filter will be automatically added to backup jobs you create You can specify the default type as include filter or exclude filter Using this option you can automatically exclude specific file types from your backups Example Suppose you want to backup or restore all pdf files accessed in the last month and all doc files Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 267 modified in the last week but you don t want to backup or restore system or hidden files Here are the steps to define this filter starting from the default filter 1 Add a new restriction in the include filter enable File name add pdf file pattern and set date accessed to be greater than or equal to fixed date one month ago click OK 2 Add a new restriction add doc file pattern and set date and time modified to be greater than or equal to fixed date one week ago click OK 3 Add a new restriction enable File attributes and the System checkbox then click OK 4 Add a new restriction enable File attributes and the Hidden checkbox then click OK 5 For the last two restrictions check the Use a
69. e Weekly select this option if you want the scheduler to be executed weekly on the days you select Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 218 Backup4all 5 Daily Weekly Monthly F Run the job weekly When One time w Weekly At user logon Weekly On idle Recur every weeks on Advanced e Monthly select this option if you want the scheduler to be executed monthly on the months and days you select Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 219 When One time Daily Weekly On idle Advanced e At user logon select this option if you want the scheduler to be executed every time at user logon t Monthly Monthly W Run the job monthly At user logon Monthly C lt Select all months gt C January O February O O March O July O August C September C October C November C December C Wednesday C Thursday 0 Friday O Saturday Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 220 Backup4all 5 When One time A At Logon Daily Monthly Run the job when the user logs on At user logon On idle Advanced e On idle select this option if you want the scheduler to be executed when the computer is idle Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Propert
70. exactly as shown Switches are preceded by slash Elements between square brackets are optional Vertical line separates possible choices Items between braces are a set of choices from which the user must choose only one e RE execute the restore for the named backup job e DEST execute the restore into the specified destination You also need to enter the path for restore e NDL execute the restore without creating the drive letter folder e DATE execute the restore of all files as of a specified date e RNC execute the restore of the specified backup numbers e RDE execute the restore including excluded and deleted files Tags Syntax bTagRestore G tag_name Priority 1 2 3 4 H e G execute the jobs containing that tag with their defined types the switch is mandatory if you want to execute a backup tag e t tests the named backup jobs to find the problems in backup e RP repairs the backup catalogs e RPWB repairs the backups in destination Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Command Line 249 10 5 For the priority level you can select a value between 1 4 as 1 is the lowest priority and 4 is the highest priority Examples To execute a restore for My Pictures backup job bRestore RE My Pictures Priority 2 To execute a restore for My Pictures backup job to another destination as of a specified date bRestore RE My Pictures DEST C Restore
71. files in the Explore view with the Show context menu option checked all actions are performed on the hard disk and any deletion will actually remove the file from your hard disk Beside the Windows Explorer context menu items there are also two custom menu items which enable the restore of the last version of a file Restore Last Version and Restore Last Version To If you want to exclude a file folder from the backup sources you can right click that file folder and choose Exclude from backup sources option This action will uncheck the file folder in Backup Properties gt Sources The file tree shows the last modified date size and attributes for each file in additional columns This information is the same as shown in Windows Explorer You can sort the files by name date size or attributes by simply clicking on the appropriate column header The files are sorted within their folders Size Modified and Attributes columns can be hidden if you right click on the column header and uncheck the names of the columns that you want to remove There are seven buttons on top of the file tree that help you show hide files depending on their status vit pressed files that will be added to the backup are shown in the tree All files with this status will have picture in front of them if pressed files that have not been changed since last backup are shown in the tree All files with this status will have picture in front of them Bf pr
72. filter options to have them automatically selected if they match a certain criteria Once you select a type of backup if there are other backup numbers depending on it they will be selected too For instance selecting a Full Backup marked with red in the list will also batch select the other incremental or differential backup numbers that depend on the selected full backup to keep some of the backup numbers that depends on the full backup you will have to start unselecting them in the order they were created Please note that when you delete a certain backup number using the Clean Backup tool all the Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 102 Backup4all 5 files in the destination that were created for that backup number will be removed There are several columns in the Clean Backup window that provide information for each backup number e Delete Shows if a backup number is selected for deletion You can manually check uncheck the backup numbers you want deleted Once selecting a backup number all the other backup numbers that depend on it will also be selected e Type Type of the backup Each of the backup types is represented by a descriptive icon and text F Full iw Incremental g Differential Mirror Additionally full backups are marked with red e Backup No Number of the backup e Backup date Date and time when the backup was executed e File No Number of files included in th
73. folder will be excluded from the backup or restore process After applying filters each file and folder is shown in the tree with a checkbox in front of it If you uncheck it the file or folder will be excluded from the backup or restore process Filter The role of the filter is to restrict the files from the sources or destination that will participate in the backup or restore process The filter actually consists of two filters the include filter and the exclude filter Include filter shows which files will be included in the backup or restore process If the filter type is Include it means the files which match the filter will be included in backup Exclude filter shows the files that will be excluded from the backup or restore If the filter type is Exclude it means the files which match the filter will be excluded from backup You can change the filter type from Include to Exclude or from Exclude to Include if you press the Change to Include Change to Exclude button If no filters are defined then all the files and folders from sources will be backed up or restored Customize There are special situations when the main filter is not enough to define the files to be backed up or restored In this case you can refine the filters adding individual filters for folders The refined filter applies to all the files and subfolders of that folder All files and folders for which a refined filter is applied are marked with red T
74. if the disks are formatted using the Universal Data Format UDF file system The advantage of packet writing is that your rewritable media can be used like a floppy or zip disk drag and drop from Windows Explorer is also possible The disadvantage of using packet writing is that CD DVD or Blu ray discs written with this method are recognized on other computers only if the same third party packet writing software is installed there too Here are the most important free packet writing applications 1 amp DELL DLA distributed by DELL free for Windows XP 2 IBM DLA distributed by IBM free for Windows XP Set Up Packet Writing There are three simple steps to set up the packet writing to work with Backup4all 1 Open New Backup Wizard or Backup Properties and go to the Destination page 2 Select the drive letter for the CD DVD or Blu ray burner device you want to use 3 You must select Use UDF file system Here you can also set the Erase disk before writing option Press the OK button 4 If packet writing is set you will see the following message on the Destination page Device name Writing method is UDF Use Packet Writing Backup4all detects if the CD RW DVD RW DVD RW or Blu ray RW disc is UDF formatted If the disc is not UDF formatted it will show the following message Disk in drive drive letter is not UDF formatted Please insert a UDF formatted disc Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be av
75. job on the tag you want to be assigned Type tt To assign a tag to a backup job just drag and drop the tag from the left side list of tags to the backup job name in the main window or open Backup Properties gt General and check the tag name Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Create Shortcut The Create Shortcut window can be opened from the Create Shortcut button located on the Jobs tab or by right clicking the backup job from the backup list and selecting Create Shortcut It creates a shortcut for the backup job on a designated location and you can simply run the backup job by double clicking it Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 77 T E Desktop v Search Desktop Organize v New folder A a W Favorites 4 PF Libraries E Desktop P System Folder i Downloads S Recent places Homegroup System Folder Libraries poe min Documents R System Folder a Music E Pictures e Computer E Videos System Folder a Homearoup Save as type Link files Ink a Hide Folders General Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 78 Backup4all 5 What g Define shortcut properties Job backup 2 y O Tag tag1 All jobs One To
76. label Use custom prefix You can type your own volume label prefix to customize the backups Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Network You can choose to save your backup to a shared network drive another computer or NAS General a Save backup to a shared network drive another computer or NAS Destination Local hard drive External hard drive Netmoik CD DVD or Blu ray Change destination to network Removable Destination TD _twore path unc FTP server Authentication SFTP server Azure User name Amazon 3 Password No password V Try Windows user and password first Sources C Reconnect if already connected Filters Test network connection Customize a aac ae ae cache Type Smart Full Differential Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced Save and run Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 160 Backup4all 5 Network You can use a network destination for your backup by selecting the Network option from the Destination window or by checking the Change destination to network option from the network page Destination Click the Browse button to open My Network Places and select a destination where the backup will be stored You can also enter network
77. location will have the same icon as the one it has in the backup list If unchecked the default Backup4all icon will be displayed What General What to execute O o Type Default v C Clear backup before run O Test Backup numbers Repair Repair catalog only Cleanup Newer than 7 2 2013 Older than 7 2 2013 Older than 3 Months Do not delete full backups Do not delete differential backups Clear the destination folder O Restore Where to restore Original location Other location a Do not create drive letter folder How to restore Restore the latest version of all files Restore all files as of 7 2 2013 Restore backup numbers Restore excluded and deleted files On this page you can select and configure what action you want to execute when double click the shortcut backup test repair cleanup or restore Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 80 Backup4all 5 What to execute e Backup Type e Default executes the default backup type defined in the backup job e Smart executes a smart backup type e Full executes a full backup no matter what the backup type defined in the backup job is e Differential executes a differential backup no matter what the backup type defined in the backup job is e Incremental executes an incremental backup no matter what the backup type defined in the backup job is Clear backup before run If th
78. lt Job Settings Folder gt Temporary Files use m M GY lt Tag Settings Folder gt Temporary Folders u a lt Catalog Folder gt H MO lt Log Folder gt p lt Plugins Folder gt M lt Scheduled jobs Folder gt i lt Host keys Folder gt z lt Ini File gt L A A Hictan Files lt gt Add folder Add files Remove Exclude v Help What do you want to backup Previous Next Save gt Cancel 3 Select how do you want to backup By default the Smart type is selected You can also use encryption for the backup types that creates zip files Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 24 Backup4all 5 How do you want to backup Smart vy _JUse the entire available destination space Encrypt O Yes New password Confirm new password Help How do you want to backup Previous Net Save gt Caneel 4 Choose when do you want to backup how often what day and what hour Schedule the backup job for unattended backup executions Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Getting Started 25 When do you want to backup How often Weekly What day Sunday What hour 1 00 PM Help When do you want to backup Advanced mode Previous lext Cancel Backup4all provides extended information about the backup which can be consulted before the backup execution You
79. of computer resources but will take the least to complete Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Schedulers The Schedulers window can be opened from the bottom left side column by pressing the Scheduler button or by pressing the F11 keyboard shortcut It lists all the available information about the scheduled tasks and allows you to Add Edit Delete and Schedule the tasks Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 104 Backup4all 5 Scheduler Layout A Edit Default backup Incremental E Restore lt P User Password fy Full BE Repair a Cleanup Add Delete Differentiaa Bemi V Test Manage Filter Refresh Refresh Scheduler Drag a column header here to group by that column rm Enabled Name Job type Scheduler Run in Action Backup Type Task file Status backup 2 w W New Backup Job Windows Background Backup Default b4a_New Backup The task is read New Backup Outlook All Tags tag tag2 Type to search There are several options available for the scheduled tasks Manage e Add allows you to easily add a new scheduled task e Edit opens the Scheduler Properties window where you can edit selected task s options when and what to run User password opens a window
80. of missing drives The user can choose Abort to stop the backup process Retry to check the drive again Ignore to mark the source folder Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 180 Backup4all 5 7 5 as deleted and continue with the next sources If the scheduler starts the backup then the system will retry as many times as set in the File gt Options gt Backup window and if still not possible to access the drive it will abort the backup process Tips e try to keep the number of checked files and folders greater than the number of unchecked files and folders backup process will run faster this way e you can add files foders to the Sources window by dragging and dropping them from Windows Explorer Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Filters The Filters page defines files and folders filters to be applied to backup sources Only files and folders that match the filters will be added to backup You can use the Add include and Add exclude buttons to add filter rules for the current backup job General Do you want to filter the files Destination Local hard drive External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Jenin Type Hiberfil on System Drive use as exclude Exclude Pagefile on System Drive use as exclude Excl
81. on disk number of sessions on the disk e Disk free space free space on disk e Disk size total size of disk e Maximum read speed of media maximum reading speed of media e Maximum write speed of media maximum writing speed of media When an erase is performed the progress bar shows the percentage of the operation completed Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 120 Backup4all 5 5 15 Options Load Closes the CD DVD Blu ray tray The button is enabled only when a device is selected Eject Opens the CD DVD Blu ray tray The button is enabled only when a device is selected Refresh list Will reload all information about the CD DVD Blu ray burners Quick erase Erases the CD DVD Blu ray disc Additional options are available in the combo e Quick erase disk appears to be empty but the data is not physically erased selected by default e Full erase will physically erase all data on disk Takes longer to perform Close Closes the Erase CD DVD Blu ray window Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Plugins Backup4all includes a plugin manager that can be found in File gt Tools gt Plugins The Manage Plugins window allows you to download add remove enable or disable the Backup4all plugins After inst
82. openssh com vV hmac ripemd160 Compression Compressions vi none zlib General Existing configuration If you want to add a new Azure location the lt New gt option should be selected To edit an existing Azure location select it from the drop down list All fields will be filled with the values of the selected Azure configuration Settings e Account name In this field you have to enter the name of your Azure account e Key In this field you have to enter the key for your Azure account Key is shared Access Signature check this option if the key is shared access signature e Container In this field you have to enter the container you want to use as destination e Folder In this field you have to enter the folder where you want to store the backups If the folder does not exist it will be created Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 175 7 3 9 Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Amazon S3 Backup4all supports backing up to Amazon S3 storage This is a practical backup destination because the backed up data can be easily accessed from any other computer with an Internet connection General Save backup to Amazon S3 Destination Local hard drive External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray R
83. original names if the correct zip password is used Tips e when choosing a password it is recommended that you use a combination of letters and numbers and at least 8 characters e make sure that you remember all passwords that have been used for a backup job or you will not be able to restore your files Split does not apply to Mirror backup type Split by size type e Automatic This is the default split option meaning that the size of the zip is limited to the maximum file Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 198 Backup4all 5 size allowed by the file system e Predefined The predefined values are provided for floppy disks zip disks and different CD media types 4 70 GB DVD y 8 5 GB DVD DL 25 GB Blu ray 1 46 GB miniDVD 750 MB CD 700 MB CD 650 MB CD 250 MB Zip 100 MB Zip e Custom size Sometimes these predefined values are not enough Therefore you can select Custom size in the combo and specify the maximum archive size you want The minimum span size is 512 kilobytes The value in the Size field means that each span should not exceed this value However because of the zip algorithm limitation the system might create spans with size up to 32 64 kilobytes smaller than this value Split by file number type e None The split by file number option is disabled e Custom files and folders number Specify the maximum number of files and folders to be includ
84. paths in the Network path UNC field Only a full path is allowed For example suppose Backup_Server PC1 is mapped on your workstation as drive X then the following paths are both valid and indicate the same folder Backup_Server PC1 Backup or X Backup Authentication Make sure you can write in the destination and in the selected folder you have the proper rights and the media is not write protected before finishing the backup configuration You can enter an User name and Password to access the network destination if it requires authentication If you are logged in as an user that has rights to write to the specified network destination you can check the Try Windows user and password first option What this option does is that it checks on the network destination if the logged in user has rights to access it You can set Backup4all to disconnect and reconnect the network drive if already connected by checking the Reconnect if already connected option By default this option is not checked After entering the path and eventually the username password use the Test network connection button to see if the destination is reachable and that you have sufficient rights to access it The network connection was tested successfully pop up message means that the network destination was accessible In case of insufficient rights the following error message will appear Network connection error Access is denied In this case you have to either make s
85. remember the password used or you will not be able to extract the log file Email Messages On successful backup send It indicates the email that will be sent when the backup is finished with success The default email is lt Default email gt but you can change it using the Open button If you press the Edit button B you can modify the selected email file except the default email Also there is the option to choose lt No email gt if you don t want Backup4all to send an email if a backup was successful On backup with warnings send It indicates the email that will be sent when the backup is finished with warnings The default email is lt Default email gt but you can change this using the Open button If you press the Edit button you can modify the selected email file except the default email Also there is the option to choose lt No email gt if you don t want Backup4all to send an email if a backup was completed and there were warnings during execution On backup with errors send It indicates the email that will be sent when the backup has failed because of an error The default email is lt Default email gt but you can change this using the Open button If you press the Edit button you can edit the selected email file except the default email Also there is the option to choose lt No email gt if you don t want Backup4all to send an email if there were errors during the Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright
86. run Switches that apply to this parameter case insensitive preceded by or e f force the execution of a full backup e d force the execution of a differential backup e i force the execution of an incremental backup e r execute the backup with its defined type this is the default behavior when the backup name is specified without switches e e erase the disc Floppy CD DVD Blu ray before backup e c deletes the bkc file and all zip files associated with the named backup job If the backup job to be executed has the backup type set to Mirror then a mirror backup will be performed and the f d i switches will be ignored even if they are set For the priority level you can select a value between 1 4 as 1 is the lowest priority and 4 is the highest priority Tags Syntax bTagBackup G tag_name Priority 1 2 3 4 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 244 Backup4all 5 You can also have as parameter an existing tag This tag must be defined in Backup4all otherwise the backup will not run Switch to apply to this parameter case insensitive preceded by or e G execute the jobs containing that tag with their defined types the switch is mandatory if you want to execute a backup tag For the priority level you can select a value between 1 4 as 1 is the lowest priority and 4 is the highest priority Examples To force a full backup on the backup job as
87. same FTP destination for multiple backup jobs and a modification is needed for destination you can change only the FTP configuration from File gt Options gt FTP and all backup jobs destinations will be updated Custom configuration Use this option to add a new FTP location or to edit an existing one by pressing the Edit configuration button Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 163 Description Here you can see a listing of the FTP settings If you configured a new FTP location or you edit an existing one you should use the Test FTP connection button to see if the FTP settings are correct If the test was successful The FTP connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Once you press the OK button Backup4all will try to connect to the FTP server to see if a backup catalog already exists on the destination If the FTP destination is not available a Cannot connect to the FTP server message is displayed in the status bar bottom of the main window Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 7 3 6 1 Edit configuration This window is shown when selecting Edit configuration from the Destination gt FTP server window General Existing configuration lt New gt v FTP server Transfer mode Binary v
88. selecting the Network option in the Where do you want to save your backup section Name your backup Backup name New Backup2 Where do you want to save your backup OFTP SFTP Azure O Amazon Folder Backup Server PC1 Renae User username L__ Help Saving your backup to a network destination Previous Save Cancel Click the Browse button and go through the My Network Places to select a destination where the backup will be stored Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland New Backup Wizard 137 6 2 3 You can also enter network paths in the Folder field Only a full path is allowed For example suppose Backup_Server PC1 is mapped on your workstation as drive X then the following paths are both valid and indicate the same folder Backup_Server PC1 Backup or X Backup Make sure you can write in the destination and in the selected folder you have the proper rights and the media is not write protected before finishing the backup configuration You can enter an User name and Password to access the network destination if it requires authentication If you are logged in as an user that has rights to write to the specified network destination you can check the First use Windows auth option What this option does is that it checks on the network destination if the logged in user has rights to access it After entering the path and eventually the username and password use the Test
89. server no anonymous access allowed enter the user name for your account e Password In this field enter the password for the SFTP server Private key e None no private key is used e Key file allows user to specify a key file that will be used e Personal certificate store allows user to import and use different certificate formats Bandwidth limitation This section allows you to set different limitations for upload download speed e Upload speed if checked you can set a maximum upload speed for the SFTP transfer e Download speed if checked you can set a maximum upload speed for the SFTP transfer Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 280 Backup4all 5 Advanced _ Verify host key IV Limit file size to Timeout seconds Authentication Authentications Encryption Ciphers MACs Compression Compressions Advanced 2027 2 MB v Larger files will be split i publickey vi password V keyboard interactive v aes128 ctr vi aes192 ctr vi aes256 ctr vi arcfour256 sA ner Enveet IO vi hmac shal Vi hmac md5 vV umac 64 openssh com vV hmac ripemd160 vV none zlib e Verify host key If checked the host key will be verified each time e Maximum file size specify the maximum file size you want to have Please note that many SFTP servers does not allow you to upload files larger than 2 GB e Timeout you can set th
90. starts the backup process for the selected backup job Make Full Backup performs a full backup regardless of the backup type Make Differential Backup performs a differential backup regardless of the backup type e Make Incremental Backup performs an incremental backup regardless of the backup type Restore opens the Restore Wizard window for the currently selected backup job Restore Latest Version starts the latest version restore process for the selected backup job Restore Latest Version To opens a window to select the folder were you want the backup to be restored e Test starts the test process for the currently selected backup job e Repair use this option to repair the backup job in destination and re copy all missing or corrupted files based on the existing information in the backup catalog e Repair catalog only use this option to remove from the backup catalog the missing or corrupted files in destination e Clean opens the Clean Backup window for the selected backup job e Cancel aborts current backup process e Pause pause the current backup test cleanup restore process e Stop stops the current backup test cleanup restore process e Job Logs lets you open and view the Last Backup Log Last Restore Log Last Test Log Last Cleanup Log and Last Statistics Log Create Shortcut creates a shortcut to the backup job Duplicate Backup duplicates a backup job Delete Backup deletes a backup job Properties opens the Back
91. tested to make sure they were safely copied The files in destination are not compared with the backup sources but with the information stored in backup catalog The Test window can be opened from the Jobs tab by pressing the Test button or by pressing the F9 keyboard shortcut It lists all the available information about the backup versions of the current backup job Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 98 Backup4all 5 v4 Test backup job A Backup numbers Select the backup numbers you want to test from the following list Backup date Backup No FileNo Folder Comp Si Uncomp size 7 1 2013 2 37 4 7 1 2013 1 42 5 7 1 2013 1 42 4 7 1 2013 1 41 4 7 1 2013 1 40 5 7 1 2013 1 31 1 Test process priority y Normal priority Test Cancel When you open the window all the backup versions that can be tested are selected You can select deselect multiple backup versions you want to be tested using batch selection on that list To define the selection keep the Shift key pressed and use the up and down arrow keys from your keyboard or the mouse If you want to select multiple individual items press and hold the Ctrl key and select using the mouse the items you want tested There are several columns in the Test window that provide information for each backup version e Type Type of the backup Each of the backup types is represented by a descriptive ico
92. the lt New gt option should be selected To edit an existing SFTP location select it from the drop down list All fields will be filled with the values of the selected SFTP SFTP server e Server name or IP In this field you have to enter the name or IP address for the SFTP server e Port In this field you have to enter the port number if different than the default SFTP ports 22 e Destination folder Here you can enter the destination path if different than root e User name If this is a private SFTP server no anonymous access allowed enter the user name for your account e Password In this field enter the password for the SFTP server Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 170 Backup4all 5 Private key e None no private key is used e Key file allows user to specify a key file that will be used e Personal certificate store allows user to import and use different certificate formats Bandwidth limitation In this section you can set different limitations for upload download speed e Limit upload speed if checked you can set a maximum upload speed for the SFTP transfer e Limit download speed if checked you can set a maximum upload speed for the SFTP transfer Advanced Verify host key Timeout seconds Authentication Authentications Encryption Ciphers MACs Compression Compressions Advanced e Verify host key If checked the host key w
93. the zip files will look like Windows does not allow the following characters in the file name lt gt Therefore Backup4all will prompt you to change these characters if present in the Customize zip name prefix field Other If the Clear archive bit option is checked the application will remove the Archive flag of the files that were added to the backup By default Backup4all uses the current comparison criteria and the information from catalog file to detect if a file was modified or not since the last backup which is more accurate than using only the Archive bit as other backup programs do However if you want to backup files based only on the Archive bit attribute you can change the comparison criteria from the Backup Properties gt Advanced window Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Smart Smart backup is a backup type which combines the full differential and incremental backup types with cleanup operations in order to efficiently manage the backups according with the backup settings and the free disk space in destination The Smart backup type starts with a full backup The advantage is that you don t need to worry about the number of backups to store in order to fit on the destination drive which backup version to clean or merge as Backup4all wi
94. the Restore Wizard and in the list of file versions in the Explore view Backup open files If checked the application will back up open files Please note backing up open files is possible only on Windows XP or higher if the file is stored on a local NTFS hard drive and the VSS service is running and properly configured Store temporary catalog data in memory If checked the catalog file will be stored in RAM memory If you receive an Out of memory warnings or you have a large catalog file we recommend you to uncheck that option If unchecked the catalog file will be stored in a temporary file on your hard drive Backup priority Using the slider you can set the backup execution priority compared to the rest of the running processes on your system Setting it to Highest priority for instance will determine the system to allocate most of its resources for this backup execution Run action before backup Run program or action Check this option and select one of the predefined actions or choose a different executable file You can either enter directly the path to the program has to be between quotes or click the button to browse for the file Backup4all waits until the action is finished before proceeding with the actual backup process Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 202 Backup4all 5 The lt Clear backup gt predefined action deletes the bkc file and all zip files associated with
95. the activation request file Save activation request Select a portable device i e USB drive as destination and move the file to a computer where you have Internet access and upload the activation request file to activate backup4all com 5 In both cases you will get a activation response file that you need to load on the 3rd page of that activation wizard then press Activate Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 304 Backup4all 5 Activate application esm Manual Activation Step 3 of 3 load the activation response file and finish the activation Use Browse to select the activation response file received by email or downloaded and click on the Activate button to finish the process C Users Admin Desktop Activate gm If you didn t receive the activation response file click on the Activate later button to start using the application and finish the activation after you have the response file 6 A message appears that the application was activated successfully After finishing the activation wizard Backup4all will be restarted to apply the changes Backup4all 5 i Application was sucessfully activated Application will be restarted Backup4all will automatically be re activated every 30 days As long as you are connected to internet that will run silently in background If you are not connected to internet for more than 30 days y
96. to filter the files This is the third step of the Restore Wizard for Choose filter files and restore the latest version restore type For Choose filter files and restore any version restore type this is the fourth step You can filter the files to be restored Its behavior is the same as the Filters page of the New Backup Wizard or the Backup Properties window except that the process is restore and not backup The Filters page defines files filters to be applied to files that are going to be restored Only files and folders that match the filters will be restored You can add include or exclude filters By default all files are included in the list to be restored Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 232 Backup4all 5 Do you want to filter the files Active Name lv Edit Normal priority i Finish Cancel The system selects only files that match the include filter and do not match the exclude filter This means the exclude filter is more powerful if a file satisfies both include and exclude filters it will not be processed by the system Include and exclude filters are composed from filter restrictions e two or more filter restrictions in the include filter means that a file must satisfy at least one restriction to be restored e two or more filter restrictions in the exclude filter means that a file must satisfy any restriction to be excluded In the Type column you can se
97. to the next backup press s File Version List If a file is selected in the tree at the bottom of the view you can see the list of the file s versions from the backup Information provided for each version e Type Type of the Backup Each of the backup types is represented by a descriptive icon v Full Incremental y Differential Mirror e Ver File version number e Bck No Number of the backup e Backup Date Date and time when the version was added to the backup e Status Status of operation performed on that file version added excluded e Size Size of the file version e Modified Date and time when the file version was last modified at backup execution e Attributes Attributes of the file version at backup execution read only hidden archive This column is hidden by default e Bkc Label Label of the backup increment This column is hidden by default The file versions in the list can be sorted by clicking on the column headers The right click menu on the column header provides a handy way to show hide unnecessary columns except the Version column which is grayed out Backup4all provides an easy way to restore any file version Just right click on the file version you want to restore and e choose Restore version if you want to restore the version in the original location e choose Restore to if you want to restore the version in another location e choose Open if you want to open view that version of the file with
98. to these types of SFTP servers using as user name Anonymous and your email address as password It is not recommended to backup important files to public SFTP servers By pressing the Test button you can check to see if the settings you have entered are correct If the test was successful The SFTP connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Azure Backup4all supports backing up to Azure remote server This is a practical backup destination because the backed up data can be easily accessed from any other computer with an Internet connection Select the Azure option from the Where do you want to save your backup section to be able to configure the backup to Azure Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland New Backup Wizard 141 Name your backup Backup name New Backup2 Where do you want to save your backup O Local O Network FTP O SFTP Azure O Amazon Use configuration My Azure account v C Lock Test Account name Account_name Key lt key is set gt _ Key is Shared Access Signature Container container Folder folder Advanced mode Previous Use configuration You can select an already defined Azure configuration given that you add
99. use the UDF disc format Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 64 Backup4all 5 5 Main Window 5 1 Commands File Layout Explore View 4 New backup al Open Backup BS Open Backup From Plugins Manage plugins Erase disc Erase CD DVD or Bluray discs Getting Started Open the Getting Started wizard Tools for working with Backup4all e New Backup creates a new backup job Import jobs from other versions 5 Import from version 5 4 Import backup jobs from Backup4all 5 4 Import from version 4 tb Import backup jobs from Backup4all 4 3 Import from version 3 4 Import backup jobs from Backup4all 3 2 Import from version 2 4 Import backup jobs from Backup4all 2 e Open Backup creates a new backup job from the opened bkc or ini file e Open Backup From creates a new backup job from the opened bkc or ini file and user can select to open the catalog from multiple locations as local hard drive network FTP SFTP Azure or Amazon S3 server e Tools Plugins opens the Manage Plugins window Erase disc opens the Erase CD DVD or Blu ray window Getting Started opens the Getting Started window Import from version 5 imports
100. where you can set the username and the password Delete removes the selected scheduled task Filter shows only the tasks matching the selected filters Default backup only the scheduled tasks running the default backup type will be displayed Full only the scheduled tasks running the full backup type will be displayed Differential only the scheduled tasks running the differential backup type will be displayed Incremental only the scheduled tasks running the incremental backup type will be displayed e Smart only the scheduled tasks running the smart backup type will be displayed e Restore only the scheduled tasks running a restore will be displayed e Repair only the scheduled tasks running a repair action will be displayed e Test only the scheduled tasks running a test will be displayed e Cleanup only the scheduled tasks running a cleanup action will be displayed e Show main only the scheduled tasks running using the main application will be displayed Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 105 e Run in background only the scheduled tasks running in background will be displayed e Windows only the scheduled tasks using the Windows scheduler will be displayed e Shutdown only the scheduled tasks running at shutdown will be displayed e Jobs only the scheduled tasks running jobs will be displayed e Tags only the scheduled tasks running tasks will be displayed e OTB on
101. you perform the differential backup too many times the size of the differential Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 189 backup might grow to be larger than the baseline full backup At the first backup execution the catalog was not created yet so the application will perform a full backup The rest of the backups contain only the files that differ from the latest full backup General f Destination re Make differential backup Local hard drive A Differential External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Select Differential as the default backup type Removable Automatically make full backup Network VJ If the differential exceeds 2 of full backup size FTP server If the differential exceeds MB SFTP server Azure Amazon S3 Sources Filters Customize Type Smart Full Differential Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced Save and run Cancel Differential If the Differential type is not your default backup type you can check the Select Differential as the default backup type option Automatically make full backup If the differential exceeds of full backup size In time the size of the differential can outgrow the full version For maximum efficiency the size of the differential should be kept as small as possible This option will trigger the creation of a full backup when a certain percentage of the full backup will be exceeded default is
102. 00 Clear archive bit 184 Clear backup 106 107 116 213 214 222 Close to tray 129 Collapse 64 Column headers 97 Command line Silent install 10 Commands 64 Comparison criteria 199 Comparison table 14 Compression 168 173 176 Configure new backup 22 Configure One Touch Backup 43 Copy 64 Create a new backup 22 Create like 64 Create shortcut 76 Customize filter 181 D Default destination 258 Default paths 258 Delete 64 Delete group 64 Delete sources 199 Description 8 Detailed logging 44 Device name 60 Differential 46 184 Differential backup 50 145 188 Disc 58 Drive letter folder 226 DVD 58 155 B ae Eject 59 61 119 Email notifications Authentication 42 Email address 42 Send test email 42 SMTP server 42 Email options Authentication 286 Dial up connection 286 Email addresses 286 Email notifications 286 Hang up 286 IP 286 Port 286 SMTP server 286 SSL 286 Empty directories 199 Enable detailed logging 44 Enclosures 40 43 Encryption 168 173 176 AES encryption 30 Zip encryption 30 Erase CD DVD 119 Erase disc 59 106 107 116 213 214 222 Exact copy 52 Exclude 236 Execute backup 26 Exit 64 129 Expand 64 Explicit SSL 163 Explore 64 Explore View 81 External device 40 Ei ee Fast mirror 52 191 Feature matrix Lite 14 Professional 14 Standard 14 Features summary 10 File filtering 236 File locations Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 310 Backup4all
103. 2 Right click on the left side list left panel of the main window and choose New Tag The Create a new tag window will appear and you can enter the name of the tag A new empty tag will be created which can be selected later from the Tags list of the New Backup Wizard or from the Backup Properties window BR New backup Ctri N DB Newtag Name for the new tag Rename a backup tag Select the backup tag from the left side list Open the File menu or right click it on the backup list and choose Rename Tag A window similar with the one for Create a new tag will appear You can enter the new name and press OK The tag will be renamed and it will keep all the backup jobs it had Delete a backup tag Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 76 Backup4all 5 5 5 Jobs All Jobs Failed Jobs Running Jobs tag New D New backup Ctrl N Backup Tag Test Tag Clean Restore Tag Repair Tag Create Tag Short Ry New Tag Rename Tag Delete Tag Select the backup tag from the left side list Go to File menu or right click in the backup list and choose Delete Tag A warning message will appear before the deletion If you choose Yes only the backup tag will be deleted the backup jobs will remain in the backup list To move backup jobs to a different backup tag you must edit the backup job s properties and select a different tag for them or drag and drop the
104. 2 software library www software112 com Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 300 Backup4all 5 Try or buy Purchase a license and activate it or try the program Thank you for choosing Backup4all Click on Buy Now if you don t own a license or on Already bought to activate Backup4all You can use it as a free trial by clicking on Free Trial Free Trial 2 Press the Manual activation button from the bottom left side of the activation window Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Help 301 Activate application Activation Activate your copy online or manually Enter your details and click on Activate Online to finalize the process If no Internet connection is available click on Manual Activation To keep your current licensing status click Cancel Activation Product key 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Registration name John Comments optional WS18 Activate Online What is activation Manual Activation Cancel Activation 3 In the email received after you purchased Backup4all there is also a license lic file attached Download that license file and load it in the bellow step Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 302 Backup4all 5 Activate application Manual Activation Step 1 of 3 enter your details To finalize
105. 3 action was finished with warnings 4 5 independent test was finished with errors independent test was finished with warnings Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Repair Backup4all uses for each action a small application that runs independently from the main application They can be used to create batch files The command line parameters for repair action are described bellow The repair action is composed by a test action followed or not it depends if you want to repair only the catalog by a backup action Backup jobs Syntax bTest T job_name RP RPWB Priority 1 2 3 4 Formatting legend Italic Information that must be supplied by the user Bold Elements that the user must type exactly as shown Switches are preceded by slash Elements between square brackets are optional Vertical line separates possible choices Items between braces are a set of choices from which the user must choose only one e t tests the named backup job to find the problems in backup Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Command Line 247 e RP repairs the backup catalog only All files and folders added in the last backup execution will be tested Those not found in destination will be also removed from t
106. 4all If the drive is formatted and recognized by Windows it will be recognized by Backup4all too Now to backup to the USB drive you should define a backup job in Backup4all that has the destination set to the USB drive To ensure this please select the backup job you want to run press CTRL P in order to open the Backup Properties window and select the USB and Firewire page under Destination Select a drive from the External hard drive drop down list You can also define a new backup job and in the Where do you want to save your backup section select the USB drive Some USB drives have a button to start the execution of an associated program If you have such a device you can configure Backup4all to execute a backup job or a backup tag when the button is pressed After the USB drive is ready go to the File gt Options menu of Backup4all select Backup on demand and press Detect to check if the USB drive is compatible with the One Touch Backup feature of Backup4all Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 42 Backup4all 5 2 13 feature matrix topic How to Send Email Notifications Send Email notifications is a very useful feature that enables Backup4all to send an email with information about the status of the perf
107. 5 O New Backup Processed Total backup size Percent Smart HDD C Users Admin Doc File progress 30 60 MB 35 58 MB 86 Outlook File count 0 13 0 A Total progress 27 22 MB 35 58 MB 76 Smart HDD C Users Admin Doc Elapsed time 0 00 08 Estimated time 0 00 05 Type to search G History x Q Scheduler O Pause Q Cancel O Stop Shutdown computer when finished X Type to search backup jobs Action Indicate the action in progress Backup Restore Test Clean Operation Indicate the operation in progress Creating file list Updating catalog Testing backup etc Current file Displays the current file processed On the Progress view page you can also see the file progress file count total progress elapsed time and estimate time The Pause Cancel and Stop buttons at the bottom of Progress view can be used for a better control of the backup jobs Shutdown computer when finished If checked at the end of the backup test repair restore execution the computer will shutdown It is useful for longer backups when the user does not want to wait til the end of the process Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 91 5 10 Open backup
108. 50 Make full backup when the differential exceeds If this is checked Backup4all will trigger the creation of a full backup when that custom size is reached default is 100 MB Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 190 Backup4all 5 7 6 4 Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Incremental An incremental backup stores all files that have changed since the last full differential or incremental backup The advantage of an incremental backup is that it takes the least time to complete However during a restore operation each incremental backup is processed which could result in a lengthy restore job General i Destination Make incremental backup Local hard drive External hard drive Select Incremental as the default backup type CD DVD or Blu ray Removable Automatically make full backup Network If all increments exceed FTP server If all increments exceed SFTP server Azure Amazon S3 Sources Filters Customize Type Smart Full Differential A mereme Mirror Compression Advanced Save and run Cancel Incremental If the Incremental type is not your default backup type you can check the Select Incremental as the default backup type option Automatically make full
109. 97 Not changed 81 Notifications 42 NTFS 199 Number of backups 86 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 312 Backup4all 5 sO s One Touch Backup 43 One Touch Backup options Detect 269 Open backup 64 91 127 Open Backup From 91 Open files 199 OTB 43 Outlook Express 150 Override catalog 152 Override filter 180 231 236 P Packet writing software 60 Passive mode 163 Firewalls 34 Password 30 Password protect a backup 30 Portability 40 Predefined backup 120 143 150 Preview 233 Previous version 127 Priority slider 97 Private key 168 173 176 Product description 8 Progress View 89 Properties 64 Proxy Port 35 Transparent 35 Proxy type 163 Q Quick erase 119 Ris Refresh 64 Refresh list 119 Reload 59 removable 157 Remove password 30 Rename group 64 Resetnode 233 Resettree 233 Restore 64 Advanced 226 Basic 226 Full 226 Restore latest version 27 Restore to 27 Restore wizard 27 Standard 226 Restore from a backup 27 Restore versions 229 Restrictions 180 231 Run a backup job 26 Run at shutdown 106 107 116 213 214 222 Run backup 26 Running 64 ae Save storage space 46 Schedule 147 Add 103 211 Close window 106 107 116 213 214 222 Command line 106 107 116 213 214 222 Delete 103 211 Edit 103 211 Hide window 106 107 116 213 214 222 Main application 106 107 116 213 214 222 Refresh 103 Schedule 211 Schedule abackup 31 Sc
110. Backup Type C Clear backup before run M Erase disk before backup OTest Backup numbers O Repair Repair catalog only Cleanup Newer than 7 2 2013 Older than 7 2 2013 Older than 3 Do not delete full backups Do not delete differential backups Clear the destination folder O Restore Where to restore Original location Other location Do not create drive letter folder How to restore Restore the latest version of all files Restore all files as of 7 2 2013 Restore backup numbers Restore excluded and deleted files Months What to execute e Backup Type e Default executes the default backup type defined in the backup job s properties e Smart executes a smart backup no matter what the backup type defined in the backup job is e Full executes a full backup no matter what the backup type defined in the backup job is e Differential executes a differential backup no matter what the backup type defined in the backup job is e Incremental executes an incremental backup no matter what the backup type defined in the backup job is Clear backup before run If this is checked Backup4all will first delete the bkc file and all zip files associated with the Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 118 Backup4all 5 current backup job and after that execute the scheduled backup Erase disk before backup This checkbox can be
111. G Export Log Filter Tools Drag a column header here to group by that column All All Jobs backup 2 New Backup 7 2 2013 3 32 25 PM 7 2 2013 3 32 2 00 00 01 New Backup Outlook New Backup 7 2 2013 3 30 48 PM 7 2 2013 3 30 00 00 02 All Tags New Backup 7 2 2013 3 29 10 PM 7 2 2013 3 29 1 00 00 00 tagl New Backup 7 2 2013 3 03 51 PM 7 2 2013 3 03 00 00 00 tag2 New Backup 7 2 2013 3 01 16 PM 7 2 2013 3 01 1 00 00 00 New Backup 7 2 2013 2 57 30 PM 7 2 2013 2 57 2 00 00 01 New Backup 7 2 2013 2 56 15 PM 7 2 2013 2 56 1 00 00 01 backup 2 7 2 2013 2 25 52 PM 7 2 2013 2 26 1 00 00 18 New Backup 7 2 2013 1 58 19 PM 7 2 2013 1 58 2 00 00 00 Outlook 7 2 2013 11 51 55 AN 7 2 2013 11 52 00 00 05 New Backup 7 2 2013 11 48 48 AN 7 2 2013 11 48 00 00 02 backup 2 7 2 2013 11 37 35 AN 7 2 2013 11 37 00 00 02 New Backup 7 2 2013 11 37 04 AN 7 2 2013 11 37 00 00 01 New Backup 7 1 2013 3 24 00 PM 7 1 2013 3 24 00 00 00 New Backup 7 1 2013 2 37 49 PM 7 1 2013 2 37 00 00 09 New Backup 7 1 2013 2 37 41 PM 7 1 2013 2 37 4 00 00 03 New Backup 7 1 2013 2 37 33 PM 7 1 2013 2 37 2 00 00 01 la Sa SRE Se Type to search aa In History window you can see all logs for the backup restore test test and cleanup actions The logs can be filtered by job tag name action type status success warning or error and date Double click or right click on a log to open it You can customize the His
112. If you select this the New Backup Wizard will start and you can create a new backup job to be used with the One Touch Backup feature e Select an existing backup job or backup tag for One Touch Backup If you select this the Backup on demand page of the Options window will open and you can select the backup job or tag you want to use This option is disabled when there is no backup job to select e Disable this feature you can activate it back at any time from Options This will disable the One Touch Backup feature You can activate it again from the Backup on demand page of the Options window If you press Cancel Backup4all will open but when you will press the One Touch button of the USB device the same dialog will be displayed This dialog will appear again if the backup job executed when the One Touch button is pressed was deleted Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic How to Use One Touch Backup You enable the One Touch Backup support from Options gt Backup on demand page At first run there is no backup job configured to execute when the One Touch button is pressed so you will have to configure it as explained in the How to Configure One Touch Backup tutorial Once everything is configured you will just have to push the One Touch button and the selected backu
113. K GLK SK KKK GLK Backup format Compress backup files zip format Obfuscate file folder name in zip archive Support for zip64 technology L4 4144S JS JS SF JS RE 6CSK Choose zip compression level Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 18 Backup4all 5 Password protected zip files Customize zip name prefix Split zip files One to one copy Copy files with NTFS security permissions and alternate streams NEW Use NTFS change journal Custom application data file locations Backup media KEK LC LRRKK 6 SKK qe 6 LLG 6 BRL LLG Backup from to local hard drives Backup from network drives Backup to network drives Backup from to external hard drives Backup to FTP SSL support active passive transfer modes firewall support Backup to SFTP NEW Backup to Azure NEW Backup to Amazon S3 Backup from to ZIP drives Backup from to removable media Backup from to CD DVD or Blu ray disc using UDF drivers Backup from to CD DVD or Blu ray disc using built in burner Backup execution Show backup progress NEW Compress catalog on destination Execute all backup configurations in a tag Perform unattended backups using built in schedulers K KK KKRKK KKK RK NASAS 4 amp SLIIR LXKX KIILIS KECK CGS K CLK KGE CCC KRKRK FKL KG QeCLK XK KK Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Introduction 19
114. MaU IK e eeaeee EETA e OnE ASAE Ne ARERIA EAN EEEN AAEEen RA PAn NE uarvebeunteseaneunee 14 Part Il Getting Started 22 1 How to Configure a New BaCkup sccsseccessecesseeseseeeeeeeeeeseaeseeseeeeneeeessaaesesneeeeeeesessaeseseeneeeneeeas 22 2 How to RUN a BaCkup Job aiioa aaa aaco aaae seen eeneeeeneaesnsneeeeneeeesaaesaseeeeneeesesaaesaseeeenseesesnaesaseeeensees 26 3 How to Manage Backup JODS cscccesccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeseaneeeeneeeeseaaeseseeeeneeeeesaesaseeeeeseeseseaesnseeaeeeaees 26 4 How to Restore from a BaCkup cccesccccseeeeeseeeeeseeesneeeenseeeseaeseseeeeneeeeeseaeseseaeenseeeesnaeseseeneesenes 27 5 How to Test a Backup a Qocteceneveetece steed vissntstbechctecetestePeebecessted resaedenccecesttveeetueeeenece 28 6 How to Password Protect a BACKUP sssccccseeeseseeesseeeeeeeeesecaeseneeeeeseeeeseaeseseeeensneeeseaesnseeeeeeaees 30 7 How to Schedule a Backup aaie aaeeei aae aea aaaea aan aeaa ap asee raoa aae aara a aaea Ce aana aaan 31 8 oE oA S TA AT oR e a A aa a E E A E T 32 Connecting in Passive Mode raa aa a Eae A a a E SE EEEa E EE a 34 Connecting Through Proxy isisisi ai e a a A i aiai 35 Using SSE Emery ptionn e a E E a EAA aE EAE a EAEE PERA EA Senra ENEA 35 9 H w t BackUp to O TZ a a a e aaae aaa ee ae ea ae re a direc ATE aapa DAE aati 36 10 How to Backup to Azure sssssssnnnsennnennennnnnennnnnnnnnnenunnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnan nnen nnn 38 11 How to Back
115. NS gt will insert the next scheduled tag execution lt BACKUP_START_TIME gt will insert the start time of the backup executed lt BACKUP_END_TIME gt will insert the end time of the backup executed lt TEST_START_TIME gt will insert the start time of test lt TEST_END_TIME gt will insert end time of test lt LAST_BACKUP_SIZE_COMPR3 gt will insert the resulted size of the last backup lt TOTAL_BACKUP_SIZE gt will insert the total backup size lt REMAINING_DISC_SPACE gt will insert the remaining space on the destination drive lt NBR_FILES_ADDED gt will insert the number of files added to the backup lt SIZE_FILE_ADDED gt will insert the size of the added files lt NBR_FILE_WARNINGS gt will insert the number of warnings lt NBR_ERRORS gt will insert the number of errors lt LAST_LOG_ NAMES will insert the name of the last log file lt EXCLUDED_SOURCESS will insert the list of sources excluded lt TESTED_VERSIONS gt will insert the list of tested backup numbers lt TEST_SUMMARY gt will insert the detailed list of test backup numbers lt REMOVED_VERSIONSS will insert the list of backups removed after cleanup lt CLEANUP_SUMMARY gt will insert the detailed list of backup numbers removed lt CLEANUP_START_TIMES gt will insert the start time of cleanup lt CLEANUP_END_TIME gt will insert the end time of cleanup lt PROCESSED_SIZE gt will insert the total size of the files removed
116. Perform unattended backups using built Windows g g8 N4 scheduler Command line Sf g g 4 Test Test backups NEW Test backup tags NEW Test amp repair backups Test FTP backups Test after backup option Set test thread priority Backup test performed after writing each disc RRL LR LG KELL LRM REC LLL SG LIILIA Create test log Restore Restore wizard NEW Schedule a restore operation NEW Restore using command line Restore specific backup increments Filter files to restore Restore all files as of specific date Restore to different folder Restore selected file Restore selected version of a file Restore selected folder Restore preview Set restore thread priority LIII RKIILKIKILS LIILIA GLK KK GK KG LIIL GLK KK GK KG ReCKRGK GLK KK GRRE Create restore log Languages Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 20 Backup4all 5 Y Y Multi language support g Legend New means the feature is new and is available only from Backup4all 5 Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Getting Started 22 Backup4all 5 2 Getting Started 2 1 How to Configure a New Backup To create a new backup job click on the New B
117. Weekly Monthly At user logon Daily On idle Recur every Advanced Run the job daily e Weekly select this option if you want the scheduler to be executed weekly on the days you select Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 112 Backup4all 5 Daily Weekly Monthly F Run the job weekly When One time w Weekly At user logon Weekly On idle Recur every weeks on Advanced e Monthly select this option if you want the scheduler to be executed monthly on the months and days you select Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 113 When One time Daily Weekly On idle Advanced e At user logon select this option if you want the scheduler to be executed every time at user logon t Monthly Monthly W Run the job monthly At user logon Monthly C lt Select all months gt C January O February O O March C September C November C December C Wednesday C Thursday 0 Friday O Saturday Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 114 Backup4all 5 When One time A At Logon Daily Monthly Run the job when the user logs on At user logon On idle Advanced e On idle select this option if you want the scheduler to be executed when the computer is
118. When a folder is selected the Add include and Add exclude buttons from the bottom are activated these are activated only for folders not for individual files That means you can replace the main filter with a different one The customized filter is valid only for the selected folder and its descendants Click the Add include or Add exclude button to define the customized filter This will open a Filter Properties window You can define include or exclude filters in this window just as you do in the Filter page All files and folders for which a customized filter is applied are shown in red color You can Edit Copy or Delete a customized filter by selecting the folder and clicking one of the buttons bellow Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 184 Backup4all 5 7 6 Type Backup type General Destination amp Local hard drive External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Removable Network FTP server SFTP server Azure Amazon S3 Sources Filters Customize Te Smart Full Differential Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced Email Scheduler Save and run A How do you want to backup Backup type Select the default backup type Smart O Full
119. aPDF SFTP FTP server Azure Custom configuration Edit configuration Description Host and port novaPDF com 22 Remote directory backup Sources User password is set Yes Private key none Filters Limit upload speed KB No Limit download speed KB No Verify host key No Type Maximum file size 1 98 GB Timeout seconds 15 Amazon S3 Customize Smart Full Differential Incremental Mirror Test SFTP connection Compression Advanced Save and run SFTP server Select the SFTP server option from the Destination window to be able to configure the backup to SFTP If the current backup destination is not an SFTP server you can change it by checking the Change destination to SFTP option Destination Use existing configuration Use this option if you want to use an already defined SFTP location in File gt Options gt SFTP From the drop down list select the SFTP location you want to use The advantage is that if you use the same SFTP destination for multiple backup jobs and a modification is needed for destination you can change only the SFTP configuration from File gt Options gt SFTP and all backup jobs destinations will be updated Custom configuration Use this option to add a new SFTP location or to edit an existing one by pressing the Edit configuration button Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 168 Backup4all 5 7 3 7 1 Description Here you can see a l
120. achable Backup4all will try 3 times at a 5 seconds delay before aborting the backup You can increase or decrease these values using the Retry and wait fields Additional settings like private key bandwidth limitation authentications encryption and compression can also be configured from this page Once you have finished defining the connection press the Test button to check if the SFTP details you have entered are correct If the test was successful The SFTP connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Setting the destination to SFTP When defining a new backup job using the New Backup Wizard select the SFTP option in the d estination section 1st page of the wizard If you already have a backup job defined and want to change the destination to SFTP select that backup job open the Properties window Ctrl P go to the Destination page and select SFTP server After that go to SFTP server page and specify an existing SFTP configuration or create a new one From the Use existing configuration select an already defined SFTP configuration given that you added one in the File gt Options gt SFTP window The description of the selected SFTP configuration will be listed bellow You can change the defined settings by selecting the Custom configuration option and pressing the Edit configuration button Here you can modify the data in the fields and press OK to save However if you do changes it is recommended to use the Test
121. ackup Backup name New Backup2 Where do you want to save your backup Local Network FTP Use configuration novaPDF SFTP Test Hos Por 2 Folder backup User username Password lt password is set gt Previous Save Cancel Use configuration You can select an already defined SFTP configuration given that you added one in the File gt Options Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 140 Backup4all 5 6 2 5 gt SFTP window All the fields will be filled with the information from the configuration file If no configuration was previously defined you will have to enter the other details Host Port In this field you have to enter the name or IP address for the SFTP server and a port if different than the default SFTP port 22 The format is host port e g ftp Backup4all com 1002 will backup to ftp Backup4all com connecting through port 1002 Folder Enter a folder name where the backup files will be stored on the remote computer via SFTP If the folder does not exist a new one is created with that name If that field is left blank Backup4all will automatically create a folder using the name of the backup job and place the backup files in there User In this field you can enter the user name for the SFTP server Password Type the password used for SFTP server access There are SFTP servers that allow anonymous access public SFTP servers You can connect
122. ackup Wizard toolbar button i For each backup job you must specify at least its name a valid storage destination and the source files first two steps of this wizard the rest of the options not being mandatory In New Backup Wizard you can switch anytime to Advanced mode for more configuration options These are the steps you must perform in the New Backup Wizard 1 Enter the name of the backup in the Backup name field and select a location where you want to save the backup You can choose as destination e your local hard drive Local e a network computer LAN e an FTP location FTP e an SFTP location SFTP e an Azure account Azure e an Amazon account Amazon Click Next to go to the following step Name your backup Backup name Where do you want to save your backup Local Network FTP O SFTP Azure Drive Local Disk C v Folder Users Admin Documents My Backup4all Help Saving your backup locally Advanced mode Previous Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Getting Started 23 2 Select the files and folders you want to backup sources of the backup or choose a predefined backup from the drop down list and click Next What do you want to backup Backup4all Configurations plugin ary clear all to backup all iles File Folder i Hiberfil on System Dri S M lt Backup4all Configuration gt Pagefile on System Dri
123. ackup to CD DVD or Blu ray Backup to CD DVD or Blu ray Backing up to CD DVD or Blu ray media has become increasingly common due to mature technology and cheap CD DVD or Blu ray burners If you plan to do a backup to a CD DVD or Blu ray disc please consider our recommendations e Do not use the same CD DVD or Blu ray disc to store consecutive backup versions It s better to use different CD DVD or Blu ray media for each backup version change the CD DVD or Blu ray disc at each backup run Use a set of CD DVD or Blu ray media and rotate them periodically e g take 7 CD media one for each week day start with the first CD again every 7 days The reason for this is that in case the burn process fails or the CD DVD or Blu ray data becomes corrupted you still have the previous backup version on a different disc Rewritable CD DVD or Blu ray media can be burned only a limited number of times When strange errors happen you should consider that the CD DVD or Blu ray disc might be over burned worn out Always test the backed up data after burning Backup4all has a special option to automate the test after backup and also in case you are spanning multiple CD DVD or Blu ray discs Backup4all test each CD DVD or Blu ray disc before writing the next one Backup4all makes the backup to CD DVD or Blu ray disc process to be easy to perform just set the backup destination to the CD DVD or Blu ray burner drive and run the backup By defaul
124. added to the last backup will be always the same with the total number of files The same for mirror backup without the Fast mirror option activated Next scheduled backup Date and time when the backup is scheduled to be executed again Next scheduled tag backup Date and time when the backup tag is scheduled to be executed again Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 88 Backup4all 5 Statistics for next backup The Calculate Statistics for Next Backup Ctrl F5 button will start counting the new modified unchanged and excluded files since the last backup execution The counters will be shown in the labels below divided into two sections Files to backup containing the counters for the files that will be added to the next backup and Changes since last backup containing the counters for the files changed since the last backup For a large number of files counting can be time consuming If you want to stop the counting process press the Cancel button from the toolbar Calculate Statistics for Next Backup Ctrl F5 uses the catalog file bkc If this catalog is on a CD DVD or Blu ray disc and you enter a previous backup version the counters will be different Files to backup counters are calculated depending on the backup job settings backup type lt Clear backup gt action etc Changes since last backup counters are always the same no matter the backup job settings Files Folders to backup For full and
125. ailable in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Writing to CD DVD or Blu ray disc By default the backup catalog bkc is stored both on the destination CD DVD or Blu ray disc and locally To see if the catalog will be stored locally too select Backup Properties for a backup job go to Advanced and see if the Use local catalogs bkc option is checked Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup to CD DVD or Blu ray 61 4 5 If it is unchecked the backup catalog is stored only on the destination The recommended option is to leave it checked When the backup process starts Backup4all searches for the bkc file locally by default assuming that you didn t uncheck the option Use local catalogs then e If the catalog file is found Backup4all will make a new version for the backup job If you wish to write the new backup version on a separate CD DVD or Blu ray disc this is recommended then you should set the Ask for a new disk before backup option e if the backup catalog is not found locally was deleted by mistake or if the Use local catalogs option is unchecked Backup4all will ask for the last CD DVD or Blu ray disc used for the backup When it finds the backup catalog Backup4all will make a new version for the files in the backup job e If the catalog file is not found on the destination eit
126. alling a plugin you can use it on the What do you want to backup page when creating a new backup job using the New Backup Wizard or on the Sources page using Advanced mode Backup Properties Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 121 View and manage plugins Download plugin list Plugin Name type to search a File Name State Local plugins Google Chrome Google chrome xml Ready Internet Explorer Favorites IE_Favorites xml Ready Microsoft Outlook MicrosoftOutlookSourc Ready Mozilla FireFox Profiles Mozilla FireFox Profiles Ready My Documents MyDocuments xml Ready My Pictures MyPictures xml Ready Windows Live Mail Windows Live Mail xml Ready o a Google Chrome Disable Uninstall File Google chrome xml File date Plugin ID 82FEFO2D 6125 464B 9240 43139B272619 Website More information Add new plugin Download plugin list Pressing this button will download and show the list of all available plugins available on our website Install This button appears when you select a plugin which is not installed on your computer Pressing the Install button will download and enable the selected plugin Uninstall This button appears when you select a plugin which is installed on your computer Pressing the Uninstall button will delete the selected plugin from your computer If you try to uninstall a backup plugin which is in us
127. allows you to define SFTP configurations that can be used on the Destination page in the New Backup Wizard or Backup Properties windows You can add edit copy or delete an SFTP connection using this window In order to add a new SFTP connection press the Add button The Define SFTP configuration window will appear in the list and you can enter the other settings for this connection General Configuration name New SFTP configuration SFTP server Server name or IP Port 22 s a Destination folder User name Password Set password No password Private key None Key file Export public ke Create key pail O Personal certificate store 2673d1b4abae704a Certificate manager Bandwidth limitation __ Upload speed 200 Download speed 200 General Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 279 Reset to configuration If you want to add a new SFTP location the lt New gt option should be selected To edit an existing SFTP location select it from the drop down list All fields will be filled with the values of the selected SFTP SFTP server e Server name or IP In this field you have to enter the name or IP address for the SFTP server e Port In this field you have to enter the port number if different than the default SFTP ports 22 e Destination Here you can enter the destination path if different than root e User name If this is a private SFTP
128. an unattended backup You can use _ Backup4all s interface to define backup jobs and backup tags which can be used later as parameters for the command line application You can create a shortcut to a backup job or to a backup tag so you won t have to use complicated paths To create a shortcut use the Create Shortcut menu item from the File menu Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Command Line 245 10 2 Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Test Backup4all uses for each action a small application that runs independently from the main application They can be used to create batch files The command line parameters for test action are described bellow Backup jobs Syntax bTest t job_name Priority 1 2 3 4 Formatting legend Italic Information that must be supplied by the user Bold Elements that the user must type exactly as shown Switches are preceded by slash Elements between square brackets are optional Vertical line separates possible choices Items between braces are a set of choices from which the user must choose only one e t tests the named backup job Supports also an additional parameter TN 1 2 5 20 if no TN is set then it will test all backup jobs same as using if is used i
129. anced SSL encryption level indicates the level of Transport Layer Security TLS required for control channel and data channel connections to the FTP server e No SSL the server does not require Secure Socket Layer transport e Implicit SSL implies that Secure Socket Layer is in use e Only explicit SSL allows the connection to the FTP server only if TLS is available e Explicit SSL if available when SSL is available uses explicit security by default The server allows regular FTP sessions without encryption as well as encrypted FTP sessions using SSL Use passive mode for transfers like WWW browsers each file transfer upload or download needs an additional connection for the data stream Normally in active mode the server establishes this connection In passive mode however the client establishes the connection This may be necessary through some firewalls which do not allow connections from outside Use extended passive mode the FTP Server operates exactly the same as passive mode however it only transmits the port number not broken into high and low bytes and Backup4all is to assume that it connects to the same IP address that was originally connected to Use this option if the normal passive mode connection failed Use XCRC when testing if available if the server supports the XCRC extension Backup4all can verify that files transferred to the server have been transmitted correctly using the CRC information received f
130. any version of a particular file To make a full or a filtered restore start the Restore Wizard by pressing the Restore button t Restore from the application s toolbar You can restore to the original location or to a different location of your choice You can restore the latest version of a file several selected files or all files from a folder by selecting the files or folder in the Explore View right click and select Restore Latest Version or Restore Latest Version To Restore F7 J Latest Version Je Latest Version To If you want to restore a particular file version switch to the Explore View select the targeted file in the tree right click on a file version from the bottom list and choose Restore or Restore to Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 28 Backup4all 5 2 5 Jobs Tags Layout Explore View e A 9 E amp e h _ OB S a S New Properties Refresh Backup Restore Backup Statistics z Messages backup hy X 7 z B Manage Execute Views Sort by Execution order Descending A New Backup 5 IE site on Microsoft Smart HDD C Users Admin Documents My Backup Microsoft At Hom 5 Microsoft At Work Microsoft Store url S MSN Websites O F MSN Autos url OA MSN Entertainmen MSN Money url a MSN Sports url F MSN url a MSNBC News url gt Type to search Restore To Open
131. at backup e Folder No Number of folders included in that backup e Total size Size of the backup Label Label of the backup increment The backup numbers in the list can be sorted by clicking on the column headers The right click menu on the column header provides a handy way to show hide unnecessary columns You can select a backup number by right clicking it and choosing Check Selected or uncheck it using Uncheck Selected The right click menu also allows selecting all backup numbers Check all or unselecting them Uncheck all Using the Priority slider you can set the execution speed compared to the rest of the running processes on your computer Default is Normal priority but there are other 4 priority levels Lowest priority Low priority High priority and Highest priority On Lowest priority the process will consume the minimum amount of computer resources but will take the longer to complete while Highest priority will consume the highest amount of computer resources but will take the least to complete Filter backups by date Newer than If checked backup numbers that are newer than the selected date will be removed when the Clean operation is executed Older than If checked backup numbers that are older than the selected date will be removed when the Clean operation is executed Older than fixed date The backup numbers that are Older than a certain fixed date will be deleted when the Clean operation is executed
132. ata from partial or total loss by automating backup tasks password protecting and compressing it to save storage space Using Backup4all you can easily backup to any local network drive backup to FTP with support for SSL encryption proxy server passive mode SFTP Amazon Azure backup to CD DVD or Blu ray disc or other removable media such as USB or Firewire drives H File Jobs Tags Layout Explore View a EJ B Open Backup Create Shortcut t Delete Backup F3 Destination Folder New Properties Refresh Backup Restore backup oy Duplicate Backup Scheduler Manage Execute Sort by Execution order kO New Backup Full HDD C Users Info Documents My Backup4all A New Backup2 Smart HDD C Users Info Documents My Backup4all eb 6 84 KB OG Zit 6 84 KB amp cce C Ol doc 43 22 KB 02t 6 84 KB 6 84 KB 6 84 KB ARAKR gt ype to search v Backup Date Status 3 7 5 2013 1 54 07 AM Added Type to search backup jobs Backup4all can backup open locked files if the files are located on local partitions on Windows XP 2003 Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 and it can perform smart full differential incremental and mirror backups When defining a backup you can also set file filters and schedule the backup for automatic execution Once a backup is performed you can see what files have been changed since the last backup or you can read the statistics about the next backup exe
133. ation we would need application build number operating system and registration details Please include in your support request the following details e Exactly what did you do e Can you reproduce the problem again e If possible send us a screenshot of the error message We might ask you for additional information if we cannot reproduce the problem If you want to report bugs feature requests or want to ask general software usage questions you can contact our support department Pressing the General Support button starts a new email message that will be sent to the support team Buy Now Backup4all has a trial period of 30 days Select the trial for the edition you want to use Professional edition fully featured application Standard or Lite edition not all features are available During these 30 days you have access to all application features After this period you ll have to decide if you want to purchase the application The Feature Matrix section presents in detail the differences between Lite Standard and Professional edition Pressing the Buy Now button will open the Backup4all website on the buy now page There you can select the quantity of licenses you need and finish the purchase Tools for working with Backup4all Options Pressing this button will opens the Options window where you can customize language display and Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Help 295 oth
134. backup Make full backup when all increments exceed of full backup size In time the size of the incremental can outgrow the full version For maximum efficiency the size of the incremental should be kept as small as possible This option will trigger the creation of a full Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 191 7 6 5 backup when a certain percentage of the full backup will be exceeded default is 50 Make full backup when all increments exceed If this is checked Backup4all will trigger the creation of a full backup when that custom size is reached default is 100 MB Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Mirror A mirror backup is identical to_a full backup with the exception that the files and folders are not compressed in zip files and they cannot be protected with a password A mirror backup is most frequently used to create an exact copy of the backup source data The sources folder tree will be recreated in the destination This backup type is the fastest provided that Fast mirror option is checked General Destinaiiin C Make mirror backup Local hard drive External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Select Mirror as the default backup type Removable Create subfolder s in desti
135. can find the Test after backup option in the Backup Properties gt Advanced window for the selected backup job Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 5 12 Clean backup The Clean backup window can be opened from the Jobs tab by pressing the Clean button It gives options to delete backup numbers based on certain criteria Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 101 C Newer than C Older than C Older than Manual selection Filter backups by type C Do not delete Full backups 4 Remove older versions from backup Filter backups by date Months Do not delete Differential backups Select the backup numbers you want to delete from the following list Del Type O Full O Full O Full fd Full lt Backup d 7 1 2013 7 1 2013 7 1 2013 7 1 2013 Backup No 6 5 4 3 File Folder 23 23 23 23 5 5 5 5 Total si Label 3 62 KB 3 62 KB 3 62 KB 3 62 KB Reset to filters Options Clean process priority C Clean the destination folder Normal priority When you open the window all the backup numbers are displayed You can either manually check multiple backup numbers you want deleted or use the
136. can switch between views by selecting one of the available views from the Job view menu e Explore shows the source files and folders for the backup job e Backup shows the list of backup executions with the sources status before each execution e Statistics shows statistics about the latest backup and the next backup job The wizard creates an ini file in the IniFiles folder usually in C lt user gt AppData Roaming Softland Backup4all 5 with the same name as the backup job In addition a backup catalog file bkc is created both in the destination and locally in the BkcFiles folder same directory where the IniFiles folder is created Manually modifying bkc or ini files may result in corrupted backup jobs and the impossibility of restoring the data you backed up A backup job is automatically created when double clicking ona bkc file You can also recreate the backup job by opening a bkc or ini file from the File gt Open Backup menu Once the backup job is created it will be displayed on the center column of the application s main window On the right you will see the content of the backup job files and folders depending on Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 26 Backup4all 5 2 2 2 3 the chosen view explore backup or statistics and on the left side you will see the tags list Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your editi
137. capacity of backup media is making overnight full backups a more realistic proposition Full backups if you have the time to perform them offer the best solution in data protection In effect a single backup can provide the ability to completely restore all backed up files However you should be aware of a significant security issue Each full backup contains an entire copy of the data If the backup media were to be illegally accessed or stolen the hacker or thief would then have access to an entire copy of your data The algorithm takes in consideration the type switch configurations and the destination size The type switch configurations will perform e Full backup if the sizes of last differential and all incremental backups since last full differential exceeds 80 of the full backup size e Differential backup if there isn t a last differential and the size of all incremental backups since last full exceeds 30 of the full size a differential backup will be executed e Differential backup if there is a last differential and the size of all incremental backups since last differential exceeds 50 of the last differential size a new differential will be executed The destination allowed size can be expressed in absolute value or as a percent of the destination size Advantages e t automatically decides the best backup type to be executed e The free disk space in destination is properly managed so you won t get out of space error
138. cesses etc and insures that if the Azure server cannot accept your connection it will not be hammered by sending log in requests frequently Configurations The File gt Options gt Azure window allows you to define Azure configurations that can be used on the Destination page in the New Backup Wizard or Backup Properties windows You can add edit copy or delete an Azure connection using this window In order to add a new Azure connection press the Add button The Define Azure configuration window will appear in the list and you can enter the other settings for this connection Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 283 Caz Define Azure configuration General Configuration name New Azure configuration Settings Account name Key C Key is Shared Access Signature Container Folder Cancel General Configuration name Enter here an arbitrary name for the connection By default the New Azure configuration name is assigned Settings e Account name In this field you have to enter the name of your Azure account e Key In this field you have to enter the key for your Azure account Key is shared Access Signature check this option if the key is shared access signature e Container In this field you have to enter the container you want to use as destination e Folder In this field you have to enter the folder where you want to store the backups If the folder does not exis
139. ckup4all Professional TRIAL will expire in 22 days Enter product key Our Projects Backup4all backup software www backup4all com novaPDF PDF creator www novapdf com Software112 software library www softwarel12 com 2 In the activation window enter the product key and the registration name then press Activate online Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 298 Backup4all 5 Activate application Activation Activate your copy online or manually Enter your details and click on Activate Online to finalize the process If no Internet connection is available click on Manual Activation To keep your current licensing status click Cancel Activation Product key 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Registration name John Comments optional WS18 Activate Online What is activation Manual Activation Cancel Activation 3 A message appears that the application was activated successfully Backup4all 5 Application was sucessfully activated Application will be restarted Manual activation Online Activation requires a working internet connection to activate the program However if your computer is not connected to the internet you can still activate Backup4all manually You can use manual activation in the rare case when the automatic activation fails due to firewall issues or internet connection
140. ckup4all supports backing up to a remote computer or device using FTP File Transfer Protocol connection This is a practical backup destination because the backed up data can be easily accessed from any other computer with an Internet connection Defining FTP configuration Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Getting Started 33 Before using FTP as a destination for backing up you should define a new FTP configuration using the File gt Options gt FTP window Once defined you will be able to apply this FTP configuration to individual backup jobs Press the Add button once in File gt Options gt FTP to add a new FTP connection The New FTP configuration name will appear in the list and you can enter the other settings for this connection e Configuration name Enter here an arbitrary name for the connection e Server name or IP In this field you have to enter the name or IP address for the FTP server e Port In this field you have to enter the port number if different than the default FTP ports 21 e Destination folder Here you can enter the destination path if different than root e User name If this is a private FTP server no anonymous access allowed enter the user name for your account e Password In this field enter the password for the FTP server There are FTP servers that allow anonymous access public FTP servers You can connect to these types of FTP servers using as user name Anonymou
141. cution You can use the context menu from the tree to run standard actions associated with the file type There is also the option to run predefined backups using the backup plugins such as My Documents My Pictures Internet Explorer Favorites Mozilla FireFox Profiles Mozilla Thunderbird or Outlook emails and settings Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Introduction 9 1 2 1 3 Backup4all has ZIP64 support can create backups over 2 GB and creates standard zip files meaning that you can access it with any zip compatible utility Backup4all also allows you to encrypt your backup using AES encryption 128 192 256 bit Backup4all keeps track of file versions You can easily restore any version of files or a whole folder You can filter files to be restored Backup4all tests the backup files automatically to ensure the backup is safe and correctly executed uses CRC32 You can also enable email notifications to receive an email in case of success error warning Backup4all works with any drive letter including mapped network drives and UNC paths It comes with its own built in CD DVD Blu ray burning support Backup4all runs on XP 2003 Vista Windows 7 Windows 2008 Windows 8 both 32 bit 64 bit and offers multi language support Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between edition
142. d C Wake the computer to run this task CI Start the task only if the computer is idle for 1 Wait for idle for 1 When to run In this section you can specify the conditions that will trigger the task Use the Add Edit and Delete buttons to manage the triggers for this task Pressing Add or Edit button will open the Trigger Properties window When Here you can select when to run the task one time daily weekly monthly at user logon or on idle The Synchronize across time zones option allows you to run the scheduled backups at the same hour if you change the time zone Select the recurrence option you want to use Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 109 One time Daily Weekly When to run Monthly Start 8 21 2013 Bv 2 33 35 PM be C Synchronize across time zones At user logon a One time Advanced Daily O Weekly O Monthly O At user logon On idle Define trigger properties Recurrence e One time select this option if you want the scheduler to be executed only one time Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 110 Backup4all 5 1 8 One Time One time Run the job one time e Daily select this option if you want the scheduler to be executed daily Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 111 When One time
143. d for data integrity verification To give a MAC a lower priority rating select it with the mouse and then click the Down button Compression SFTP supports the use of data compression to reduce the amount of data that is transmitted Both the client and server agree on a compression algorithm They then compress data before sending and decompress data when it is received Typically zlib compression is the compression algorithm most commonly supported in SFTP servers No compression is set as the default and zlib is specified as an option If the server forces use of zlib compression it will happen automatically Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Azure Backup4all supports backing up to Azure storage This is a practical backup destination because the backed up data can be easily accessed from any other computer with an Internet connection Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 172 Backup4all 5 General Destination Local hard drive External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Removable Network FTP server Cas Save backup to Azure Azure Change destination to Azure Destination My Azure account Use existing configuration Edit configuration Custom configuration SFTP server Amazon S3 Descr
144. ddresses Connection encryption None Azure From support backup4all com Amazon 53 Reply to D aai Updates Server requires authentication Notifications Passwords Dial up connection Automatically start up V Hang up when finished Email notifications Enable email notifications If checked the email notifications are available in the backup jobs on the Advanced Emails page in Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 287 the backup job Properties or New Backup Wizard accessible from the File menu By default this option is not checked SMTP server Server Name or IP Enter the DNS name or IP address of the SMTP server to be used to send emails example mail yourdomain com This field is mandatory Port Enter the port number to be used by the SMTP server to send the emails The default value is 25 Connection enctyption e None if selected no connection encryption will be used e SSL if selected the Secure Socket Layer SSL will be used for control channel and data channel connections to the SMTP server e TLS if selected the Transport Layer Security TLS will be used for control channel and data channel connections to the SMTP server Send Test Email Press Send Test Email if you want to test the configuration you just entered In the box that pops up enter the email address where you want to receive notifications and press OK If all the settings
145. dit configuration button Description Here you can see a listing of the Amazon S3 settings If you configured a new Amazon S3 location or you edit an existing one you should use the Test Amazon connection button to see if the Amazon S3 settings are correct If the test was successful The Amazon S3 connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Once you press the OK button Backup4all will try to connect to the Amazon S3 server to see if a backup catalog already exists on the destination If the Amazon S3 destination is not available a Cannot connect to the Amazon S3 server message is displayed in the status bar bottom of the main window Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Edit configuration This window is shown when selecting Edit configuration from the Destination gt Amazon S3 server window Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 177 Define Amazon S3 configuration Access Key ID Secret Access Key Bucket Folder Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 178 Backup4all 5 Advanced _ Verify host key V Limit file size to 2027 MB v Larger files will be split Timeout seconds 15 Authentication Auth
146. dows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista and Windows 7 File attributes available for file filters e Read Only if checked files with read only attribute will be selected e Archived if checked files with archived attribute will be selected e Hidden if checked files with hidden attribute will be selected e System if checked files with system attribute will be selected e Compressed only NTFS if checked files with compressed attribute will be selected e Temporary only NTFS if checked files with temporary attribute will be selected e Encrypted only NTFS if checked files with encrypted attribute will be selected e Not indexed only NTFS if checked files with not indexed attribute will be selected e Offline only NTFS if checked files with offline attribute will be selected e Reparse point only NTFS if checked files with reparse point attribute will be selected e Sparse file only NTFS if checked files with sparse file attribute will be selected For example if you want to include files with read only and archived attributes set you have to check both attributes checkboxes in a single restriction If you want to include files with read only or archived attributes set you have to make two separate restrictions one for read only and another for archived File dates Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 266 Backup4all 5 This section allows the user to build restricti
147. drive FTP server Folder A SFTP server Lock the destination to this external hard drive Azure _ Enable disk spanning Amazon S3 Sources Filters Customize Type Smart Full Differential Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced Save and run Cancel External hard drive Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 155 7 3 3 If the current backup destination is not an external hard drive you can change it by checking the Change destination to local hard drive option Destination From the External hard drive list you can select either an USB or a Firewire external hard drive You can type a folder name in the Folder field or you can click the Browse button to choose another folder where the backup will be stored In destination folder field you can use Environment Variables as Computername SystemDrive UserName etc Lock the destination to this external hard drive When disconnecting and reconnecting an external drive your computer may not assign it the same drive letter If the drive letter was changed the backup might fail because Backup4all is trying to backup to the same old drive letter which probably does not exist Use this option if you want Backup4all to detect the external drive after its own serial number and automatically change the backup destination according with the new drive letter You should not check this option if you use a r
148. dy way to show hide unnecessary columns except the Enabled and Name columns which are grayed out You can also schedule a task from the Backup Properties gt Scheduler window The difference between the two methods is that the Backup Properties gt Scheduler window displays the scheduled tasks only for the selected backup job while Schedulers F11 will show you the scheduled tasks for all the backup jobs and tags Backup4all uses the Windows Task Scheduler in order to run the scheduled tasks so you need to make sure that the Task Scheduler service is enabled on your computer Use the Windows Help in order to find out more information about scheduling a task using the Task Scheduler Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 106 Backup4all 5 5 13 1 General This is the fist page of the Scheduler Properties window which appears when you click on the Add or Edit button in the Scheduler window of Backup Properties or in the global Scheduler F11 page of the application This allows you to add or edit a scheduled task for the current backup job O Tag O All jobs One Touch Backup Execute Show main application Close after run Scheduler With Windows scheduler User account W7 PC
149. e backup files that match the filter or exclude do not backup files that match the filter By default the list contains filters to exclude temporary and system files folders such as hiberfil sys pagefile sys System Volume Information Temp etc If you don t want to use a filter from that list simply clear un check it Clear all filters if you want to backup all files Tips e try to keep the number of checked files and folders greater than the number of unchecked files and folders backup process will run faster this way e you can add files folders to the Sources window by dragging and dropping them from Windows Explorer Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic How do you want to backup In the third step of the New Backup Wizard you can choose the backup type How do you want to backup Smart w _ Use the entire available destination space Encrypt Help How do you want to backup Advanced mode Previous Net Save gt Cancel Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 146 Backup4all 5 How do you want to backup From the drop down list you can choose one of the available options e Smart Make full Make differential Make incremental Make mirror Smart The smart backup type will combine full diffe
150. e When destination not ready section Recommendations for backing up to Amazon S3 1 After each change to the Amazon S3 configuration be sure to use the Test function 2 If you backup important data to a remote location using Amazon S3 encrypt the zip files for increased security In this case even if another person manages to gain unauthorized access to your Amazon S3 account your files will still be protected Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic How to Backup to USB or Firewire drives You can backup your data to an USB or Firewire drive and from an USB or Firewire drive using Backup4all This is a practical backup destination as it allows you to store important files to external Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Getting Started 41 devices offering increased portability It can be considered as an additional protection against data loss as the result of hardware failure or other disasters There are external USB hard drives with performance comparable to conventional hard drives These portable drives called enclosures are composed of devices that connect through USB on one side and to conventional hard drives on the other side A hard drive is installed into the enclosure and then the enclosure is plugged into the comput
151. e as window where you can type a name and select the path for the file The history will be exported into a CSV file format Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Import The Import window can be opened from the File menu Depending on your previous Backup4all version you can select one of these options e Import from version 5 e Import from version 4 e Import from version 3 e Import from version 2 The Import from version 4 option also appear when you run for the first time a newly installed Backup4all major version on a computer where a previous major version of Backup4all is installed If you select this option and no previous major versions were installed you ll be informed that there are no backup jobs to import Could not find previous versions of Backup4all If you had previous major versions installed you ll have the option to import the backup jobs from a previous major version of Backup4all Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 128 Backup4all 5 Import from Backup4all Professional 4 Select ini files to import Import v Name Group Backup4all 4 job My Backup Jobs Check all Uncheck all Scheduler User account W7 PC Admin Set password The format of the user
152. e available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 11 11 SFTP The SFTP page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item contains SFTP settings General Preferences Startup Application folders Backup Filters Logs and history Backup on demand CD DVD or Blu ray FTP Azure Amazon S3 Email Updates Notifications Passwords J 18 Manage SFTP servers When SFTP server not ready Retry times Wait seconds Configurations Name novaPDF SFTP Host keys Host keys folder Clear cache When SFTP server not ready Cancel The first number Retry option indicates how many times the application tries to access the Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 278 Backup4all 5 destination server if it is not available By default this option is set to 3 attempts The second number wait option indicates how many seconds to wait between two consecutive attempts to access the destination location By default this option is set to 5 seconds This option is useful when the destination FTP server has restrictions i e only 2 users logged in the same time no of accesses etc and insures that if the FTP server cannot accept your connection it will not be hammered by sending log in requests frequently Configurations The File gt Options gt SFTP window
153. e by any of the backup jobs from Backup4all you will get a warning message that the plugin cannot be deleted as it is used in backup jobs Disable This button appears when you select a plugin which is installed and enabled on your computer Pressing the Disable button will disable the plugin it will not appear in the backup wizard anymore but the plugin remains on your computer Enable Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 122 Backup4all 5 5 16 This button appears when you select a plugin which is installed but not enabled on your computer Pressing the Enable button will activate the selected plugin on your computer so it will be visible in the backup wizard Add new plugin Press this button to install a new backup plugin You will be asked to select the plugin file location from your computer Multiple plugin files can be selected and open Close Press this button to close the Manage Plugins window Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Logging Backup4all provides a log engine that helps you track the backup restore test clean and calculate statistics operations It is composed of four subsystems backup logging restore logging test logging and cleanup logging Log files are accessible from the Jobs tab His
154. e cloud storage Azure storage Configuration Folder Configure Azure lt Azure storage not configured gt bke v Folders Files Modified Open backup from Amazon S3 storage Use this page if the catalog is located on Amazon S3 Configure the Amazon S3 storage or choose an existing configuration Press Show to display the folders and selected file types bkc or ini Press Scan to display a list of only bkc ini files from all folders and subfolders in that location Here you can see how to configure the Amazon S3 storage Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 97 5 11 Local hard drive Network Open backup from Amazon S3 cloud storage FTP server Amazon 3 storage SFTP server Azure storage Configuration Configure Amazon S3 Amazon S3 storage lt Amazon 3 storage not configured gt Folder bke v Show Scan i Folders Files Size Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Test The backup test is meant to ensure the validity and the integrity of the backup files and the backup catalog During test all files and folders from destination will be
155. e ee aT acc cede A EEEN TEAOR EEEE AEREA 84 Statistics View enaa a ei a a aa a A r a E A ee eee 86 Progresss VIEW eiie neern rae aap seas KEEA a NeT NAER EANNAN TARANA EE 89 Open Dacku o E aE EE T TTT 91 Tesi Os a RE RS a aa a a SE SO aeaa 97 ETAT o EE E EE EEA E E E 100 Sehed ulers oroare aN E NR EEE AEN eee E N ARE 103 G ner l ciane e a a a seta gc te ces ca pau a a e aeae ieee aa aa ar Sia 106 AL Pa en eS eo ee ee 107 What saa carasknaeenghdt ett a a case dee Ale ee Miele esate tote ate coe 116 Erase CD DV D Blueray sssiciscctecisteci cence athe oan a etter 119 PUUQUINS 9 secs ese hae eerie wach A AA A AT 120 PO OGING sceces cosccse anas dens sos cacecedets ane raea e Ee e vacate cats a aad aee PANER Eea Eae aR eaaa 122 plicio a SE E E AT TTT AT ET 125 mpo o aa ET EENE E 127 System Tray E E E E ee eae cs Teed re T 129 Keyboard SMOmtCuts rs oreo cess os Se rre Eae re eE r eE ar e an co ae reae raea Eaa aae aae aaar raaa hasa Sedh Ea deian aE 131 New Backup Wizard 133 OVERVIGW aira eaaa AEE EE EE E E E R E A E E E 133 Name and destination sccceseeecceseseeeeeseseeeeeeseeneeeeesenneeeeseneneesesenneeeeeseseeeseseeneeesaseseeeenseeeneees 133 r S EE TEOT T E T T TTT 135 Aian o n na EEn EEN Ea AEAEE E EEEE E AE E EEEE EEE E E EE 136 FIP ja a a e a a a pat a e E ace hes eee E a eae 137 SFTP O iraina eataa andaa didate ENa atad aT iaaea eaaeo diaaa innata aieia Ta E peaa aaaeaii 139 Jaan a e A T E acce
156. e if the filter is for include or exclude To change the filter type press the Change to Include or Change to Exclude button You can manage filter restrictions using the buttons e Add include this will open a new window from where you can add a new restriction to the list of include filters e Add exclude this will open a new window from where you can add a new restriction to the list of exclude filters e Edit will open the same window as Add with the selected filter s properties You will be able to modify the selected restriction e Copy will create a copy of the selected filter e Delete will delete the selected filter from the list Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Restore Wizard 233 8 5 Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Preview the files to be restored This page is the final step of the Restore Wizard It appears only if the Preview files at the end of wizard option is checked The purpose of this step is to show a preview of the files that will be restored If any other customization is required user must go back and reselect the files to be restored Preview the files to be restored File Folder Size Modified Backup No boc Users 6 amp Info G Desktop B B Sources aaa
157. e is an user logged on e Run whether the user is logged on or not the task will run even if there is no user logged on Password press this button to set the Windows login password for the specified user account At system shutdown If this is selected the task will be executed when the shutdown command is started Backup4all intercepts the shutdown message and there is no way to know if a restart or a shutdown was requested This is why it will always shutdown your computer after the task is executed Priority Indicates the task priority Move the cursor to right or left in order to increase or decrease the priority Notifications Force all notifications to timeout use this option to close all notification messages even if they are set to never expire Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic When On this page you can set when do you want to execute the scheduled task Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 108 Backup4all 5 O Scheduler Properties Oo General qu e What General it when o When do you want to execute it What When to run Specify the conditions that will trigger the task Enabled Trigger Description Add Edit Delete C Run task as soon as possible after a scheduled start is misse
158. e possible exit codes e 0 action was successful 1 action has not started parameter errors syntax errors other errors 2 action finished with errors e 3 action was finished with warnings 4 independent test was finished with errors 5 independent test was finished with warnings Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Command Line 251 Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options Options 253 11 11 1 Options General The General page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item contains general settings of the program Preferences ak General options Startup Use settings for Current User O All Users Application folders Backup All options and backup jobs are available for the current user only Filters Logs and history Security Backup on demand Lock program interface with a password CD DVD or Blu ray Pass Set password ee Language Select language English Azure Amazon S3 Email Updates Notifications Passwords Cancel Use settings for Current User If this is selected the settings used in Backup4all including backup jobs are available only for the current logged i
159. e protected Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 38 Backup4all 5 2 10 Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic How to Backup to Azure Backup4all supports backing up to Azure server This is a practical backup destination because the backed up data can be easily accessed from any other computer with an Internet connection Defining Azure configuration Before using Azure as a destination for backing up you should define a new Azure configuration using the File gt Options gt Azure window Once defined you will be able to apply this Azure configuration to individual backup jobs Press the Add button once in File gt Options gt Azure to add a new Azure connection The New Azure configuration name will appear in the list and you can enter the other settings for this connection e Configuration name Enter here an arbitrary name for the connection Account name In this field you have to enter the name of the Azure account Key In this field you have to enter the key for your Azure account Container Here you have to enter the container s name Folder If you want to use a specific folder type here its name In the When Azure server is not ready section you can enter the number of attempts and time between those attempts to
160. e same media can be written and read by any operating system or vendor Each CD DVD or Blu ray disc must be UDF formatted before burning otherwise the backup will fail The limitation of this type is that you must have an UDF reader installed on each computer you wish to use the CD DVD or Blu ray disc Volume label Use custom prefix You can type your own volume label prefix to customize the backups Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 7 3 4 Removable You can save your backup to a removable drive USB flash drive floppy etc as destination for backup Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 158 Backup4all 5 General Destination Q Save backup to a removable media USB flash drive floppy Local hard drive For slow devices enable the Always use temporary folder to create zip files option see Compression External hard drive Removable CD DVD or Blu ray Removable v Change destination to removable media Network Destination FTP server Removable drive SFTP server Folder A Azure Lock the destination to this removable drive Erase before writing Amazon 53 Sources Volume label Filters C Use custom prefix Customize Type Smart Full Differential Incremental Mirror
161. e settings are correct If the test was successful The Azure connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Once you press the OK button Backup4all will try to connect to the Azure server to see if a backup catalog already exists on the destination If the Azure destination is not available a Cannot connect to the SFTP server message is displayed in the status bar bottom of the main window Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Edit configuration This window is shown when selecting Edit configuration from the Destination gt Azure window Cas Define Azure configuration General Existing configuration lt New gt Settings Account name Account_name Key lt key is set gt C Key is Shared Access Signature Container container Folder folder OK en Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 174 Backup4all 5 Advanced _ Verify host key V Limit file size to 2027 MB v Larger files will be split Timeout seconds 15 Authentication Authentications v publickey vi password V keyboard interactive Encryption Ciphers vi aes128 ctr A J aes192 ctr vi aes256 ctr vi arcfour256 sF arrfns170 MACs vi hmac sha1 A vV hmac md5 vV umac 64
162. e time interval in seconds that is allowed for no data transfer before the transfer operation is interrupted and must be resumed Default is 15 seconds Authentication You can select which authentication methods will be used when backing up Available options publickey password and keyboard interactive The priority of these options can also be changed Encryption Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 281 11 12 e Ciphers clear or select the check boxes to specify which ciphers you want to allow for encrypting SFTP sessions A Cipher is the algorithm s used for symmetric session encryption To give a cipher a lower priority rating select it with the mouse and then click the Down button e MACs clear or select the check boxes to specify which MACs you want to allow for encrypting SFTP sessions A MAC Message Authentication Code is the algorithm s used for data integrity verification To give a MAC a lower priority rating select it with the mouse and then click the Down button Compression SFTP supports the use of data compression to reduce the amount of data that is transmitted Both the client and server agree on a compression algorithm They then compress data before sending and decompress data when it is received Typically zlib compression is the compression algorithm most commonly supported in SFTP servers No compression is set as the default and zlib is specified as an op
163. ead Only FAT NTFS A Archived FAT NTFS Hidden FAT NTFS System FAT NTFS Compressed only NTFS File dates _ Enable date modified gt today File size _ Enable lt 50 MB File attributes Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland File Filtering 239 Enabling this section allows the user to specify file filters depending on the file attributes There is a list of quick sets to choose for predefined filter criteria e Custom this is the default option and allows you to check whatever attributes you want e None if this is selected all the file attributes check boxes are unchecked e FAT attributes if this is selected a set of File Allocation Table attributes will be used for file filtering e NTFS attributes if this is selected a set of NTFS New Technology File System attributes will be used for filtering Note that these attributes are available only on Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista and Windows 7 File attributes available for file filters e Read Only if checked files with read only attribute will be selected e Archived if checked files with archived attribute will be selected e Hidden if checked files with hidden attribute will be selected e System if checked files with system attribute will be selected e Compressed only NTFS if checked files with compressed attribute will be selected e Temporary only NTFS if checked files with temporar
164. ed by the applications If the exit code is O zero it means the action was successful If the exit code is different than O zero the action was not successful and the backup will be aborted Run action after backup Run program or action Check this option and select one of the predefined actions or choose a different executable file You can either enter directly the path to the program has to be between quotes or click the button to browse for the file Backup4all does not wait for the action to be finished before proceeding Available predefined actions e lt Stand by gt The computer will enter in the Stand by state after the backup is executed e lt Hibernate gt Computer enters in Hibernate if available after the backup execution e lt Log off gt Logs off current user e lt Shut down gt Shuts down the computer after the backup was executed Run only once If this option is set the action will run only once at the next backup execution and the Run program action option will be reset and disabled Run program or action on You can set conditions to run the action after the backup on Success on Warnings or on Errors You can check multiple options or a single one but at least one option must be checked Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 203 Comparison Criteria This section contains special settings for advanced file comparison You can set what p
165. ed in a zip file This option is useful if the application is using a lot of computer memory Create independent splits Using this option each backup split can be independently restored If you have a large backup that spans over several removable media CD DVD Blu ray floppy each spanned backup can be independently restored Thus if one of the spanned backup disks is corrupted you can still restore the other files Example you have a backup that was spanned over 20 CDs and you didn t leave the Create independent splits option checked If you need to do a restore and one of the zip files is damaged you lose all the data from the 20 CDs Now if the Create independent splits would have been checked even if one zip file would have been damaged the data from the other 19 could have been recovered Each zip file created with Backup4all can be extracted with standard zip utilities However when using the Create Independent Splits option and backing up a file big enough to be split into more than one zip file you will need to perform an additional operation if you want to restore that file manually without using Backup4all For more information on how to manually restore the data from independently created zip archives visit this section Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix to
166. ed one in the File gt Options gt Azure window All the fields will be filled with the information from the configuration file If no configuration was previously defined you will have to enter the other details Account name In this field you have to enter the Azure account name Key Type the key for your Azure account If the key is Shared Access Signature you need to also select that option Container In this field you can type the Azure container name where the backup files will be uploaded Folder Enter a folder name where the backup files will be stored on the Azure server If the folder does not exist a new one is created with that name If that field is left blank Backup4all will automatically create a folder using the name of the backup job and place the backup files in there Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 142 Backup4all 5 6 2 6 By pressing the Test button you can check to see if the settings you have entered are correct If the test was successful The Azure connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Amazon Backup4all supports backing up to Amazon S3 This is a practical backup destination because the backed up data can be easily accessed from
167. ed to trigger the creation of a new full backup e Automatically make full backup if the differential exceeds of full backup size default is 50 e Automatically make full backup if the differential exceeds default is 100 MB The system calculates the backup size for the differential backup and if the selected condition is met it performs a full backup Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Incremental Backup What is Incremental Backup An incremental backup stores all files that have changed since the last full differential or incremental backup The advantage of an incremental backup is that it takes the least time to complete However during a restore operation each incremental backup must be processed which could result in a lengthy restore job Description of the Incremental Backup Type Incremental backup provides a faster method of backing up data than repeatedly running full backups During an incremental backup only the files that have changed since the most recent backup are included That is where it gets its name each backup is an increment since the most recent backup The time it takes to execute the backup may be a fraction of the time it takes to perform a full backup Backup4all uses the information recorded in its catalog file bkc
168. eld is mandatory The name of the backup job is closely related to the name of the subdirectory in destination that contains zipped and mirrored files and to the name of the catalog That is why when you rename the backup job the name of the catalog and the name of the subdirectory from destination are also changed if possible If the destination is on HDD local LAN network FTP SFTP Azure or Amazon S3 remote the name of the subdirectory and the name of the catalog can be always changed except for the case when you do not have enough permission to rename or some files are locked If the destination is on a removable disk CD DVD or Blu ray disc floppy disc and you have run the backup job the catalog and the subdirectory in destination are already created and they will not be changed If the backup job has not been run yet then the catalog and the subdirectory will be created with a name similar to the backup job at first backup run Tag Select the tag where you want the backup job to appear If no tag is available or you want to define a new tag just press Add new tag and type the name of the tag to create it The new tag will be automatically assigned to the current backup job Description You can write in here a text describing the backup job defined Icon Press the Change Icon button to manage the backup job icons This icon will be shown in the Backup List You can add a new icon by clicking on the Add button Only Windows ic
169. elected folder Filters Type Smart Full Active Name Differential Add y r Delete Change to Include Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced _ Save and run The customized filter can be defined only for folders That is why add button is not enabled for files Any customized filter completely replaces the main filter Once defined the customized filter applies on the current folder and recursively on all its subfolders until another customized filter is met The behavior is the same for include and exclude filters File Folder M O C Users Info Desktop Sources aaa bbb E 01 bet E 02 txt MO cee E 01 doc E 02 bt G M O ddd E 01 bt E 02 bt 01 b t 02 doc Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 183 Suppose we have the folder structure in the picture above Backup source is D Backup sources A main filter is defined to include all txt and doc files Suppose we do not want to backup txt files from ccc folder For this we define a customized filter on ccc that includes only doc files The result is that all txt and doc files will be included except the txt files inside ccc folder as in the picture bellow File Folder 3 M O C Users Info Desktop Sources aaa 3 MO bbb v E 01 bt v E 02 t4t
170. emovable Amazon S3 Change destination to Amazon 3 Destination Network My Amazon 3 account Use existing configuration FTP server Custom configuration Edit configuration SFTP server Description Azure Access Key ID 321321 Secret Access Key Yes Bucket backup bucket Dest folder backup Filters Use https Yes Customize Type Smart Full Sources Differential Incremental Mirror Test Amazon connection Compression Advanced Save and run Cancel Amazon 3 Select the Amazon 3 option from the Destination window to be able to configure the backup to Amazon S3 If the current backup destination is not an Amazon S3 server you can change it by checking the Change destination to Amazon 3 option Destination Use existing configuration Use this option if you want to use an already defined Amazon S3 location in File gt Options gt Amazon S3 From the drop down list select the Amazon S3 location you want to use Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 176 Backup4all 5 7 3 9 1 The advantage is that if you use the same Amazon S3 destination for multiple backup jobs and a modification is needed for destination you can change only the Amazon S3 configuration from File gt Options gt Amazon S3 and all backup jobs destinations will be updated Custom configuration Use this option to add a new Amazon S3 location or to edit an existing one by pressing the E
171. enaacncced EET 262 7 LOGS and hiStory csisasininain ia aai a Aia nii aa aaa a a 267 8 Backup on demand ceceeecceeeeeee cee eeeeee ee enenee eee en sees seen sneee eee seeeseeen sees seeegneeeseeaseeeeeeeaseeeeeenseeeeeeenss 269 9 CDs DVD or Blu ray s sicc ici ssccctectcccsteces seceded ioea she eee decals A eh a ale eae 270 T0 FIP OO a a aaa aa ra a aaa a adaa nde ect phate ea aaae a aa a aaa aaea aiaa 272 AV GRUP E E E E E E E EAT 277 PARVAN a E E E E A E E E E E E 281 13 Amazon S3 oececiecinc ceceeiss Seceesscctcceenstecteeesscsecsenvanncteesvccecesessuceceessucoeceeseteeseesktcceves seceuevessuteceeavdececees 284 14 Email aS SS a SS eS an a 286 15 Updates sitter ee eel et eer eee eee 288 TGs NOUPICATIONS EEA EE E A sees She Ni wvece cen E 290 UT PASSWOKAS E A chen n idecDeete ds senda cnceebedea csutuentectendedaves eatisle soci wueiees a A 291 Part XII Help 294 T sACUV ATION osie aaaea aaa aai e a aa A aade iade eaaa aa da aa adiasa 295 PADI Y CHI VATION nae ne EE E A TATA ceneses decctpaneeecets s 305 3 Check for Up dA ES r ccf ea ss cc eset ect ce cad ends a a aan ae a aa par ccd a EEn a dee apa raaa aaa aae aa oaaae aE 306 4 Eegal holta Siopa ENE EA EEEE EEA NEA 306 Index 308 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Introduction Backup4all 5 1 1 Introduction Product Description Backup4all is an award winning backup software for Windows Backup4all protects your valuable d
172. entications vi publickey vi password V keyboard interactive Encryption Ciphers vi aes128 ctr A J aes192 ctr vi aes256 ctr vi arcfour256 sF arrfns170 MACs vV hmac shal A Vi hmac md5 vV umac 64 openssh com vV hmac ripemd160 Compression Compressions vi none zlib General Existing configuration If you want to add a new Amazon S3 location the lt New gt option should be selected To edit an existing Amazon S3 location select it from the drop down list All fields will be filled with the values of the selected Amazon S3 configuration Settings e Access Key ID In this field you have to enter the access key ID for your Amazon S3 account e Secret Access Key In this field you have to enter the Secret Access Key for your Amazon S3 account e Bucket In this field you have to enter the bucket you want to use as destination You can also create a new bucket if you type its name and press Create button e Folder In this field you have to enter the folder where you want to store the backups If the folder does not exist it will be created Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 179 Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 7 4 Sources The Sources page defines what files and folders will be used by
173. entioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 5 6 Explore View You can activate Explore view by e pressing the Explore button from the Jobs tab e pressing F2 keyboard shortcut Ob Backup4all 5 0 d File T Explore Vie cre Re s m ic Name a All Jobs A New Backup i C Failed Jobs HDD C Use Users B Info amp Desktop 6 Sources aaa gt Running Jobs New Backup2 v Bck a Backup Date Status E a Restore Version 1 Tiza amp Restore To Open History ka Scheduler View with Notepad Compare with Source Compare Versions Select columns d The Explore View consists of a File Tree on top and a File Version List at the bottom File Tree Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 82 Backup4all 5 The file tree content depends on the backup sources and file filters defined for the selected backup job You can right click on the folders and files in the tree to open the same context menu that is available from Windows Explorer if the option Show context menu from File gt Options gt Preferences is checked If that option is unchecked the right click operation will display only the Restore Latest Version and Restore Latest Version to You can select multiple files Be careful about handling
174. er thus creating a normal USB backup device Given the size of nowadays hard drives this can be considered a mass storage device for backup purposes There are external hard drives that beside the USB technology use also Firewire as a connection port On one side Firewire hard drives tend to have increased speed over USB but on the other side USB ports are more common on computers Steps in backing up to USB drive with Backup4all 1 Start your USB device Before starting the backup process make sure that the USB drive is started and working Usually the enclosure should have a start button and display the status of the drive using led displays When it is started a green led should be lighted 2 Make sure your drive is formatted If you have just purchased the drive and didn t use it yet you might have to format it only if you didn t use it before since formatting will erase everything from it Formatting the USB drive in Windows Vista e Go to Start gt Settings gt Control panel gt System and Maintenance gt Administrative Tools gt Computer Management If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation e Under Storage click Disk Management e To format the volume with the default settings in the Format dialog box click OK and then click OK again e Test to see if the drive is now recognized by going to Windows Explorer a new drive letter should appear 3 Configure Backup
175. er gets excluded because of the changes in file folder filter or because it was deleted or moved from the backup sources Total files folders to backup Shows the total number of files and folders that will be added to backup next time This should be the sum of the new modified and unchanged file and folder counters Total size uncompressed to backup Shows the sum of all file sizes to be included in the backup next time it is executed Free disk space on destination Shows the available free disk space on the destination drive Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Progresss View You can activate the Progress view by e pressing the Progress button from the Jobs tab e pressing the CTRL F3 keyboard shortcut Please note Progress view is active only when the backup is running When the backup is not running that option is grayed out When the backup is started Backup4all will switch automatically to Progress view and after the backup is done it will switch back to your previous view Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 90 Backup4all 5 Jobs Tags Layout Control Pause Cancel Stop Job lt Sort by Executi Descending Acton Backup A Backup backup 2 Operation Prepare files list Adding Current file surse 04 0
176. er name Password Set password No password Bandwidth limitation Upload speed 200 Download speed 200 General Configuration name Enter here an arbitrary name for the connection By default the New FTP configuration name is assigned Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 274 Backup4all 5 FTP Server Server name or IP In this field you have to enter the name or IP address for the FTP server Transfer mode Here you can select the transfer mode Binary ASCII or Auto e Binary it refers to transferring files as a binary stream of data The binary mode transmits the raw bytes of the file being transferred In this way the file is transferred in its exact original form ASCII it stands for American Standard Code for Information Interchange and is a type of character encoding based on the English language used on devices that handle information stored in text It includes 33 non printed control characters and 94 printed characters such as letters and punctuation e Auto according to the list of ASCII files defined in File gt Options gt FTP the files will be uploaded in ascii or binary mode depending on their extension By default binary mode is selected and it applies only to Mirror backup type That is useful if you have a Linux FTP server as backup destination and want to download the backed up files with another application which uses the Auto transfer mode Uploading the fil
177. er settings Check for Updates Pressing the check for updates button will open the updates window showing the available updates 12 1 Activation Use Backup4all as trial for 30 days Before purchasing a license and activating it online you have the option of testing it for free The trial version has the same features as the paid version and it will work for 30 days To continue using it after the trial expires you will have to purchase a license and activate it Once the program is activated you will be able to continue using Backup4all without having to reconfigure anything extra Follow the steps below to start your trial 1 Open Backup4all The activation window will appear Try or buy Purchase a license and activate it or try the program Thank you for choosing Backup4all Click on Buy Now if you don t own a license or on Already bought to activate Backup4all You can use it as a free trial by clicking on Free Trial Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 296 Backup4all 5 2 Pressing the Free trial button opens a new page where you can select which edition you want to use Professional Standard or Lite Try or buy Select which edition you want to try Professional is the full edition with all features enabled Standard and Lite have fewer features you can see a detailed comparison here Feature Matrix Features Professional Standard Lite Mirror backup Y
178. ers Standard encryption Zip2 compatible Password Set password Obfuscate file names in zip Customize Type Smart Full Split by size type Automatic Split does not apply to Mirror backup type Differential Predefi AT D Incremental Predefined 4 70 GB DVD Mirror C Custom size 2 GB Advanced Oe Custom files and folders number 1000000 Email CI Create independent splits Scheduler Restoring split files with standard zip utilities requires extra steps Read the help file for further details Save and run Save Cancel Zip compression Level You can set different compression levels for the backup e Zip without compression Fastest files are just copied inside the zip archive without any compression e Low compression Fast select this option if the size of the zip archive is not important but the speed of the backup is e Normal compression Medium this is usually the best choice because it provides the optimum rate between zip archive size and the backup speed e Best compression Slow use this compression level to reduce the zip archive size as much as possible the backup speed is reduced Use No compression or Low compression if you backup large files to speed up the backup process Use High compression when you want to create the smallest archive possible This option takes Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 196 Backup4all 5
179. erties will be used to create new backup jobs Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Name and destination In the first step of the New Backup Wizard you can configure the backup name and the backup destination Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 134 Backup4all 5 Name your backup Backup name New Backup Where do you want to save your backup Local O Network OFP O SFTP Drive Local Disk C v Folder Users Info Documents My Backup4all Help Saving your backup locally Advanced mode Sav Cancel Name your backup Backup Name Enter the name of the backup job This name will appear in the backup list right under the chosen picture This field is mandatory The name of the backup job is closely related to the name of the subdirectory in destination that contains zipped and mirrored files and to the name of the catalog That is why when you rename the backup job the name of the catalog and the name of the subdirectory from destination are also changed if possible If the destination is on HDD local LAN network FTP SFTP Azure or Amazon remote the name of the subdirectory and the name of the catalog can be changed except for the case when you do not have enough permissions to rename it or some files
180. es folders that are in the backup job and the new files that will be stored at the next backup execution You can sort and search the file tree in Explore view You can start this backup application at windows startup or minimize it to the system tray Backup locked or open files XP 2003 Vista Windows 7 Windows 2008 Windows 8 Backup4all uses the Volume Shadow Copy service that allows you to back up local open files from NTFS partitions in Windows XP 2003 Vista 2008 Server Windows 8 Now you can backup your emails and settings without closing Microsoft Outlook Outlook Express or other email clients File and Folder Filters Powerful file and folder filtering engine with lots of options to filter by attribute size date name and type You can create filters using a combination of restrictions and you can define separate Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Introduction 11 filters for inclusion and exclusion Manage multiple backup jobs This backup software allows defining multiple backup jobs and saving them for future use On the main form you have an overview of all defined backups organized in tags Backup4all comes with several predefined backup jobs My Documents My Pictures Outlook Express and allows importing backup plugins for dozens of other applications Email notifications You can configure Backup4all to send custom emails after a backup finished with success error and warning noti
181. es to a Linux server in binary mode and downloading them in Auto mode causes the files to be modified by adding a new empty line at the end of each file Port In this field you have to enter the port number if different than the default FTP ports 21 Destination folder Here you can specify a destination folder on the remote FTP server where the backup will be stored If the entered folder does not exist it will be created on the server If no destination folder is set Backup4all will automatically create a folder using the name of the backup job User name If this is a private FTP server no anonymous access allowed you have to enter the user name for your account Password In this field you can enter the password for the FTP server There are FTP servers that allow anonymous access public FTP servers You can connect to these types of FTP servers using as user name Anonymous and your email address as password It is not recommended to backup important files to public FTP servers Bandwidth limitation This section allows setting different limitations for upload download speed e Upload speed if checked you can set a maximum upload speed for the FTP transfer e Download speed if checked you can set a maximum upload speed for the FTP transfer Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 275 Advanced SSL encryption No SSL y V Use passive mode for transfers like WWW browsers
182. esired location Whenever you will double click that shortcut the backup job defined will start running You can make it a one click backup if you place that shortcut in the Quick Launch menu Statistics You can actually see the number of files that will be processed at next backup very useful when you have a large number of files Other information refers to the size and date of the executed backups and the available free space on storage destination Play custom sounds Backup4all can play custom success warning error sounds at the end of the backup File warnings File warnings are displayed to the user during backup execution if the user chooses so These warnings are also written to the log file Scheduled backups do not show these warnings even when this option is set New Backup Wizard This backup software provides step by step instructions to create a new backup job by selecting Where What How and When to backup Easy File and Folder Selection You can browse a folder tree to select several files and folders as source of the backup or you can include or exclude them individually Multiple files folders can be added as Sources at once drag and drop supported Backup Types Different backup types to choose from smart backup full backup differential backup incremental backup and mirror backup Smart backup This backup type was designed to automatically decide the backup type to use and the number of versions to store g
183. ess d logfile awk r file htc d m3u bat r forward htm sini m4 lt Type to filter Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 273 When FTP server not ready The first number Retry option indicates how many times the application tries to access the destination server if it is not available By default this option is set to 3 attempts The second number wait option indicates how many seconds to wait between two consecutive attempts to access the destination location By default this option is set to 5 seconds This option is useful when the destination FTP server has restrictions i e only 2 users logged in the same time no of accesses etc and insures that if the FTP server cannot accept your connection it will not be hammered by sending log in requests frequently Configurations The File gt Options gt FTP window allows you to define FTP configurations that can be used on the Destination page in the New Backup Wizard or Backup Properties windows You can add edit copy or delete an FTP connection using this window In order to add a new FTP connection press the Add button The Define FTP configuration window will appear in the list and you can enter the other settings for this connection General Configuration name New FTP configuration FTP server Server name or IP Transfer mode Binary v Applies only to mirror Port 21 Destination folder Us
184. essed files that have been changed since last backup are shown in the tree All files with this status will have D picture in front of them If pressed files that are already present in backup and are now excluded by new changes in file filter are shown in the tree All files with this status will have amp picture in front of them X if pressed files that have been deleted from hard disk are shown in the tree All files with this status will have Si picture in front of them Ti if pressed all directories in the tree will be expanded For a large number of files and directories this operation can take a longer time Press the ESC key to stop the process Z If pressed all directories in the tree will be collapsed If you do not want to see empty folders when clicking on Expand all check Hide empty folders on expand all in the File gt Options gt Preferences window and check Hide empty folders on expand all The tree will show only folders containing at least one file There is an easy way to search for a file in the files and folder tree simply start typing the file s name Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 83 and the matching file name will be selected Only files that are visible in the tree are found so if you want to search in all files you have to do an Expand all first If you want to see only the backed up files press these buttons 80 xX For the files that will be added
185. etect device 40 Format device 40 One Touch Backup 40 Start device 40 USB drive 40 152 USB enclosure 269 Use builtin driver 59 Use One Touch Backup 43 Use packet writing 60 V View menu 81 Visualization Maximized 257 Window state 257 Volume Shadow Copy 199 W Warn before erasing 61 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 314 Backup4all 5 Windows 2000 9 Windows 2003 Server 9 Windows 98 SE 9 Windows Me 9 Windows NT SP6 9 Windows scheduler 106 107 116 211 213 214 222 Windows XP 9 Wizard 133 150 Writing to Blu ray 60 Writing to CD 60 Writing to DVD 60 XCRC 163 Zip backup 47 49 186 188 Zip compression 195 Zip drive 152 Zip encryption 195 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland
186. etween zip files is necessary to keep at the latest file version from each zip file to be merged However when changing between Mirror and Full Incremental or Differential the older versions are deleted The Limit number of file versions option will delete from the backups only the files that have more versions than the maximum allowed limit to keep the number of versions under the specified limit The Limit number of backups option will delete the backups to maintain the maximum limit Customize prefix of backup files Typically the name of the zip file is something like 1_C zip 1_D zip etc one zip for each drive Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 186 Backup4all 5 7 6 1 The names of these zip files do not make much sense for the user but they can be customized by pressing the Insert tag button Following tags are predefined e Backup Name lt BACKUP NAME gt e Backup Number lt BACKUP NUMBER gt e Backup Type lt BACKUP TYPE gt e Backup Date lt DATE gt Backup Time lt TIME gt e Backup Hour e Backup Minute e Backup Second Backup Year lt YEAR gt Backup Month lt MONTH_MMM gt e Backup Month numeric lt MONTH_MM gt Backup Day lt DAY gt Backup Week lt WEEK gt Backup Day of Week lt DAY OF WEEK gt Backup Day of Week locale Backup Day of Week numeric You can also add your text in the edit tag field Use the Preview button to see how the names of
187. f it is not available By default this option is set to 3 attempts The second number wait option indicates how many seconds to wait between two consecutive attempts to access the destination location By default this option is set to 5 seconds This option is useful when the destination Amazon S3 server has restrictions i e only 2 users logged in the same time no of accesses etc and insures that if the Amazon S3 server cannot accept your connection it will not be hammered by sending log in requests frequently Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 285 Configurations The File gt Options gt Amazon 3 window allows you to define Azure configurations that can be used on the Destination page in the New Backup Wizard or Backup Properties windows You can add edit copy or delete an Amazon S3 connection using this window In order to add a new Amazon S3 connection press the Add button The Define Amazon S3 configuration window will appear in the list and you can enter the other settings for this connection Define Amazon S3 configuration General Configuration name New Amazon 3 configuration Settings Access Key ID Secret Access Key Bucket Folder OK Cancel General Configuration name Enter here an arbitrary name for the connection By default the New Amazon S3 configuration name is assigned Settings e Access Key ID In this field you have to enter the access key ID f
188. fessional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Erase CD DVD Blu ray The Erase CD DVD Blu ray window can be opened from the File gt Tools gt Erase disc menu item o BME Rios ener Maximum read speed of device 18005 KB s Maximum write speed of device 5540 KB s readCD R CD RW DVD DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW DVD R DL Writing capabilities CD R CD RW DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW Disk type DVD RW Sessions on disk 1 Disk free space 1 08 GB Disk size 1 31 GB Maximum read speed of media 18005 KB s Maximum write speed of media 5540 KB s I HL DT ST BD RE GGW H20L YLO5 Maximum read speed of device 7056 KB s Maximum write speed of device 7056 KB s readCD R CD RW DVD DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW DVD R DL Refresh list When the window is shown devices capable of writing to CD DVD or Blu ray disc are listed in it The first device from the list is selected by default A summary of properties is shown for each device calculated by Backup4all s internal burner e Maximum read speed of device shows the maximum reading speed of the device kb s e Maximum write speed of device shows the maximum writing speed of the device kb s e Reading capabilities displays a list of media the device can read from e Writing capabilities displays a list of media the device can write to e Disk type shows the type of media inserted e Sessions
189. fications Environmental variables can be used in the email title and body Additional options allow you to attach the backup log file and send the email to several addresses Pause Resume or Stop operation The backup operation supports pausing and resuming so running a backup job can be interrupted and continued at a later time There is also a Stop operation now that when pressed will not Cancel the backup but instead will save everything until that point when it was pressed Automatic updates Backup4all can now check for updates either manually or automatically at a scheduled date This allows you to better stay in touch with the latest development of Backup4all Backup catalog file Backup4all stores a summary snapshot of the file and folder information into a backup catalog file bkc each time a backup is executed This catalog is stored in a different file than the backup itself and it allows Backup4all to keep track of the backed up files The advantage of using a catalog is faster backup execution Another advantage is that you can run Backup4all together with other backup applications because they will not interfere with each other Backup directly to CD DVD Blu ray This backup software comes with its own built in CD DVD Blu ray burning support Just set the destination on CD DVD Blu ray disc and execute the backup job However you can use UDF format using SPTD driver installed with Backup4all or other products such as DirectCD
190. forms a full backup for all jobs containing that tag regardless of the backup type defined in Backup Properties Differential performs a differential backup for all jobs containing that tag regardless of the backup type defined in Backup Properties Incremental performs an incremental backup for all jobs containing that tag regardless of the backup type defined in Backup Properties e Backup all jobs will back up all jobs with the backup type defined in Backup Properties e Restore e Restore restores the latest version to its original location without showing the Restore wizard for all jobs containing that tag e Restore to restores the latest version to a specified location without showing the Restore wizard for all jobs containing that tag e Repair e Repair starts the backup repair for all jobs containing that tag e Repair catalog only starts the repair of the backup catalog for all jobs containing that tag e Test e Test latest version starts the test for the latest backup version of all jobs containing that tag e Test all versions starts the test for all backup versions of all jobs containing that tag e Clean opens the Clean tag window Layout This page contains the buttons for the Backup4all interface General Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 71 Navigation Restore Pane Default Layout General e Navigation Pane indicate how the left side navigat
191. ful when you want to use the same predefined filter in several backup jobs All locked job filters will be updated when the predefined filter is changed in Options gt Filters Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Command Line Command Line 243 10 10 1 Command Line Backup Backup4all uses for each action a small application that runs independently from the main application They can be used to create batch files The command line parameters for backup action are described bellow Backup jobs Syntax bBackup f d i r job_name e c Priority 1 2 3 4 Formatting legend Italic Information that must be supplied by the user Bold Elements that the user must type exactly as shown Switches are preceded by slash Elements between square brackets are optional Vertical line separates possible choices Items between braces are a set of choices from which the user must choose only one Command line backup can have as parameters an ini file with its full path a bkc file with its full path or the name of the backup job The ini or bkc file must exist in the specified path the backup job must be defined in Backup4all or otherwise the backup will not
192. g files and whole Temp folder will be filtered e Suppose you want to backup or restore all pdf files accessed in the last month and all doc files modified in the last week but you don t want to backup or restore system or hidden files Here are the steps to define this filter starting from the default filter 1 Add a new restriction in the include filter enable File name add pdf file pattern and set date accessed to be greater than or equal to fixed date one month ago click OK 2 Add a new restriction add doc file pattern and set date and time modified to be greater than or equal to fixed date one week ago click OK 3 Add a new restriction enable File attributes and the System checkbox then click OK 4 Add a new restriction enable File attributes and the Hidden checkbox then click OK 5 For the last two restrictions check the Use as exclude filter boxes If filters predefined in File gt Options gt Filters are used in Backup Properties gt Filters you have the possibility to lock that filter selecting the Lock to filter option Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland File Filtering 241 What do you want to do Create new Create new starting from Use existing Hiberfil on System Drive use as exclude By locking a filter in Backup Properties to a predefined filter File gt Options gt Filters all changes of the predefined filter will propagate to the job filter This is use
193. g up to a remote computer or device using FTP File Transfer Protocol connection This is a practical backup destination because the backed up data can be easily accessed from any other computer with an Internet connection Select the FTP option from the Where do you want to save your backup section to be able to configure the backup to FTP Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 138 Backup4all 5 Name your backup Backup name New Backup2 Where do you want to save your backup Local O Network FTP O SFTP Azure O Amazon Use configuration novaPDF FTP v _ Lock Test Host Port ftp novapdf com 21 Folder backup User username Password lt password is set gt Advanced mode Previous Use configuration You can select an already defined FTP configuration given that you added one in the File gt Options gt FTP window All the fields will be filled with the information from the configuration file If no configuration was previously defined you will have to enter the other details Host Port In this field you have to enter the name or IP address for the FTP server and a port if different than the default FTP port 21 The format is host port e g ftp Backup4all com 1002 will backup to ftp Backup4all com connecting through port 1002 Folder Enter a folder name where the backup files will be stored on the remote computer via FTP If the folder does not exist a new o
194. gt e Backup Day of Week lt DAY OF WEEK gt e Backup Day of Week locale e Backup Day of Week numeric You can also add your text in tag field Use the Preview button to see how the name of the subfolder will look like Note that the Fast mirror option will be ignored if you choose to create subfolders in the destination with a different name each time Backup4all 4 a If you use tags the Fast mirror option might be ignored Do you want to continue The option is useful to store snapshots of the backup sources at different points in time For example if you insert a lt DATE gt tag in the Create subfolder s in destination with following name and schedule Backup4all to do a mirror backup daily Backup4all will create every day a copy of your backup sources in a subfolder named as the date when the backup was executed On the other hand if you insert a lt MONTH_MMM gt tag and execute the backup daily the first time your sources will be copied entirely in a subfolder named as the month when it was performed but in the other remaining days of the month only the new or changed files will be copied in the same subfolder when the month name will change another subfolder will be created and the procedure repeated Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 193 Options Fast mirror copy only new or modified files Use this option to make mirror backups even fas
195. h the Host value and the User name and optional Password for the FTP site e Send command OPEN Sends the User name and optional Password defined in the proxy settings sends the OPEN command with the Host value and the User name and optional Password for the FTP site USER user firewalluser hostname PASS pass firewallpass Sends the command USER user proxyuser host then the command PASS pwd proxypwd or optionally PASS pwd e Transparent Sends the User name and optional Password defined in the proxy settings followed immediately by the FTP server User name and optional Password Host name or IP In this field you have to enter the host name or IP address for the proxy server firewall Host port Enter the host port number in this field By default the port number is set to 80 User name This field is used to enter the proxy user name Password In this field you can enter the password for the specified user name Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 277 ASCII file types It includes the list of all file extensions that will be transfered as ASCII when using Auto transfer mode for FTP uploads You can filter add edit or delete the file extensions listed here Please note if you add non ASCII file types in this list when you back up such files in ASCII mode they will get corrupted and you won t be able to use them Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not b
196. hat this option is available only when Do not delete full backups is checked because differential backups depend on full backups e Clear the destination folder Deletes files and folders that should not be in the destination folder Only the files mentioned in backup catalog are kept e Restore select this option if you want to schedule a restore action e Original location use this option to restore files in the original location e Other location use this option to restore files in another location Do not create drive letter folder if this option is checked when restoring to another location the drive letter folder won t be created e Restore the latest version use this option to restore the latest version of all files e Restore all files as of use this option to restore the files as they were on a specified date e Restore backup numbers use this option to restore one or more backup numbers Restore excluded and deleted files if this option is checked excluded and deleted files will be also restored Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Restore Wizard 226 Backup4all 5 8 Restore Wizard 8 1 Where and how to restore Using the Restore Wizard you can restore from a backup job
197. he FTP site USER user firewalluser hostname PASS pass firewallpass Sends the command USER user proxyuser host then the command PASS pwd proxypwd or optionally PASS pwd e Transparent Sends the User name and optional Password defined in the proxy settings followed immediately by the FTP server User name and optional Password Host name or IP In this field you have to enter the name or IP address for the proxy server firewall Host port Type the port number if different than the default port 80 User name This field is used to enter the proxy user name Password In this field you can enter the password for the specified user name Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic SFTP server Backup4all supports backing up to a remote computer or device using SFTP SSH File Transfer Protocol connection This is a practical backup destination because the backed up data can be easily accessed from any other computer with an Internet connection Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 167 General 1 iE Save backup to an SFTP server Destination Local hard drive External hard drive eae See CD DVD or Blu ray v Change destination to SFTP Removable Destination Network Use existing configuration nov
198. he backup catalog for the current backup job Keeping a local copy of the catalog is recommended in most cases except when using a backup rotation scheme to back up to CD DVD or Blu ray disc USB or external drives Example the option Use locals catalogs is unchecked and you are performing an incremental backup to DVD but on each working day you re changing the DVD so that if one DVD fails you ll still be able to recover most of your files So on Monday you insert DVD 1 Backup4all runs and performs a full backup On Tuesday you insert DVD 2 which is empty and Backup4all performs a full backup that includes all the data that s on DVD 1 plus the data that was added in between Now if the Use local catalogs option would have been checked Backup4all would have executed on DVD 2 an incremental backup because of the full backup already executed on DVD 1 Compress catalog in destination If this option is checked the bkc catalog file in destination will be compressed This is required if you use the obfuscate option from the Compression page and it s also useful for large catalogs to save the storage space Test after backup If this option is set Backup4all will test the resulting backup for data integrity after every backup process Only the latest backup number will be tested after the backup execution If you wish to test other backup numbers you can do so from the Test Backup window If this option is selected the backup catalog will be als
199. he backup catalog so they will be backed up on the next backup execution e RPWB repairs the backup in destination All files and folders added in the last backup execution will be tested Those not found in destination will be backed up again in order to reflect the backup catalog If only the catalog needs to be repaired use only the RP switch For the priority level you can select a value between 1 4 as 1 is the lowest priority and 4 is the highest priority Tags Syntax bTagTest G tag_name RP RPWB Priority 1 2 3 4 e G execute the jobs containing that tag with their defined types the switch is mandatory if you want to execute a backup tag e t execute the test for the the named backup jobs to find the problems in backup e RP execute the repair for the backup catalogs only All files and folders added in the last backup execution will be tested Those not found in destination will be also removed from the backup catalog so they will be backed up on the next backup execution e RPWB execute the repair for the backups in destination All files and folders added in the last backup execution will be tested Those not found in destination will be backed up again in order to reflect the backup catalog For the priority level you can select a value between 1 4 as 1 is the lowest priority and 4 is the highest priority Examples To execute a repair for My Pictures backup job bTest t My Pictures RP RPWB Priori
200. he backup is finished with success The default sound is lt Default beep sound gt but you can change it using the Open button If you press the Play button p you can hear the selected sound file To disable this sound you can select from the drop down box lt No success sound gt On warning It indicates the sound that will be played when the backup is finished with warnings The default Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 205 7 9 sound is lt Exclamation sound gt but you can change this using the Open button If you press the Play button gt you can hear the selected sound file To disable this sound you can select from the drop down box lt No warning sound gt On error It indicates the sound that will be played when the backup has failed because of an error The default sound is lt Asterisk sound gt but you can change this using the Open button If you press the Play button gt you can hear the selected sound file To disable this sound you can select from the drop down box lt No error sound gt Open sounds This button will open the standard Sounds and Multimedia Properties gt Sounds window of the operating system that can also be opened from the Control Panel You can use this to configure or troubleshoot your sounds settings Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional editio
201. he installation process you can select another language for the setup wizard and Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 10 Backup4all 5 1 3 1 1 4 the location where application will be installed Click on the Install Now button to start the installation process On the bottom you can also read the License Agreement Uninstall To uninstall Backup4all first you need to close the application Then go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and select Uninstall a Program option Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Command Line Parameters Installing Backup4all with command line parameters Backup4all can be installed with various command line parameters that are useful when an unattended installation is needed Syntax msiexec i b4a pro msi switches Switches can be any combination of the following parameters INSTALL_FOLDER Overrides the default directory name displayed on the Select Destination Location wizard page A fully qualified pathname must be specified INSTALL_LANGUAGE Overrides the default installation language Features Summary Intuitive interface The Getting Started window allows you to easily define run backup jobs or restore backed up data Switching to the Explore View you can see all the fil
202. he selected backup number will be restored If you select all backup numbers then a full restore is performed just as the Choose filter files and restore the latest version restore option Note If you used the Limit number of file versions option restoring the files as of a specified date could not restore all your files if some of them were deleted by the file version limitation If you use the Mirror backup type the Restore as of feature is not available The Mirror backup type does not keep track of file versions Only the last version is available for restore Information provided for each version e Type Type of the Backup Each of the backup types is represented by a descriptive icon W Full Incremental J Differential Mirror e Backup Date Date and time when the version was added to the backup e Backup No Number of the backup increment Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Restore Wizard 231 e File No Number of files in the backup e Folder No Number of folders in the backup e Comp Size Size of the file version compressed e Uncomp Size Size of the file version uncompressed e Label Label of the backup number This column is hidden by default Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 8 4 Do you want
203. heduler 64 Standalone scheduler 31 Task scheduler 31 Send email notifications 42 SFTP 139 166 Hammering 36 Portnumber 36 Remote location 36 Retry times 36 SSH 36 SFTP options Hostname 277 Password 277 Port 277 Retry 277 Username 277 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Index 313 SFTP options Wait 277 Shortcut 76 Show context menu 81 Show deleted 64 Show disk label message 61 Show excluded 64 Show modified 64 Show new 64 Show unchanged 64 Size 81 Smart backup 186 Snapshot 52 Sources Abort 143 179 Add files 143 179 Add folder 143 179 Ignore 143 179 Remove 143 179 Retry 143 179 Spanning 58 Speed 155 SPTD 61 SPTI 61 SSH 277 SSL 272 281 284 Encryption 35 Explicit SSL 35 Implicit SSL 35 Layer 35 Secure 35 Sockets 35 SSL encryption level 163 Standalone scheduler 103 106 107 116 211 213 214 222 Start backup 26 Startup options Windows startup 257 Statistics 64 Statistics View 86 Status 81 Summary 64 228 System requirements 9 System tray 129 i oe Task 211 Task scheduler 103 Temporary folder 58 Test 64 199 Testa backup 28 Test after backup 28 Test backup 28 97 Testlog 28 Timeout 163 Toolbar 64 254 Trayicon 129 Close 257 Minimize 257 Show errors 257 Type differential 188 Type full 188 Type incremental 190 Type mirror 191 Type Smart 186 U UDF 60 155 UNC network drive 152 Universal Data Format 60 usb 154 157 USB backup D
204. her Backup4all will start with a new full backup Backup4all will automatically span the backup over multiple media if the size of the backup job does not fit on a single CD DVD Blu ray disc For each disc Backup4all will assign a different label for future identification We recommend marking the CD DVD or Blu ray disc with this label When spanning multiple CD DVD or Blu ray discs Backup4all will create independent zip files meaning that if you have a backup that spans over 3 CDs and if one of the CDs becomes unreadable you will still be able to access and recover the data on the other 2 CDs It is recommended to always leave the Test after backup option Backup Properties gt Advanced checked especially if your backup is written on CD DVD or Blu ray disc In case of disk spanning Backup4all will test your backed up data after each individual written disc This way if one of the discs has errors you know before the backup job is finished and you can interrupt the backup process in time Note that when backing up to CD DVD or Blu ray disc Backup4all requires additional free space on the drive where the Temporary Folder is located at least 7OOMb when backing up to CDs 4 7Gb when backing up to DVDs or 25GB when backing up to Blu ray discs Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature ma
205. here the notification emails will be sent You can enter multiple email addresses separated by comma Log Attach log file to email If this option is checked the backup log file will be attached to the email Uv ww ww Vee eve v Cancel Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 207 Compress the log file Option is active only if Attach log file to email option is checked If this option is enabled Backup4all will zip the log file before sending it Additionally you can encrypt the log file Log 4 Attach log file to email v Compress the log file No encryption Strong encryption AES 128 bit strong v Standard encryption Zip2 compatible Password Set password No password No encryption The zipped log file created is not protected by password for unauthorized access Zip 2 compatible encryption This is the standard Zip 2 0 encryption an older encryption technique that provides relatively weak security compared to AES encryption Zip 2 0 encryption format cannot provide protection from individuals with access to specialized password recovery tools Its advantage over AES encryption is the compatibility with all third party zip applications AES encryption This is the Advanced Encryption Standard the best choice in zip protection but recognized only by the latest version of third party zip applications Backup4all su
206. his by allowing SSL encryption support when using FTP and also AES encryption for the backed up zip files SSL Secure Sockets Layer is a protocol used for transmitting private documents via the Internet SSL uses a cryptographic system that uses two keys to encrypt data a public key known to Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 36 Backup4all 5 2 9 everyone and a private or secret key known only to the recipient of the message Backing up to FTP using SSL encryption 1 In Backup Properties gt FTP server gt Custom configuration or the File gt Options gt FTP window 2 From the SSL encryption level box select an option that applies to your situation e No SSL the server does not require Secure Socket Layer transport e Implicit SSL implies that Secure Socket Layer is in use e Only explicit SSL allows the connection to the FTP server only if SSL is available e Explicit SSL if available When SSL is available uses explicit security by default The server allows regular FTP sessions without encryption as well as encrypted FTP sessions using SSL 3 Press OK and test your connection Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic How to Backup to SFTP Backup4all supports backing up to a remote computer or device using
207. how hidden files in open dialogs Toolbar Minimize the Ribbon If checked the ribbon menu will be minimized By default it is not checked Show Quick Access Toolbar bellow the Ribbon If checked the Quick Access Toolbar will be shown bellow the ribbon menu By default it is not checked Customize ribbon This option allows you to customize the toolbars commands and options Views Default view The selected view will be assigned as default to the Views button from the application toolbar The possible views are Explore Backup and Statistics Show explorer icons If checked a small icon is shown for each file in the Explore view The icon is the standard icon Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 256 Backup4all 5 associated with the type of the file You will see the same icons as in Windows Explorer If the Explore view contains a large number of files you can uncheck this option to show files faster By default this option is checked Hide empty folders on expand all If checked the folders that do not show any file in the Explore view will be automatically hidden when pressing the Expand All button By default this option is not checked Show context menu If checked it will display the context menu when right clicking on a file or folder in the main window s Explore view or the Sources page of the Backup Properties and New Backup Wizard windows By default this option is checked Measu
208. ible with the device you could use the command line parameters to create a command that can be associated to the One Touch button of your device See this section for details Backup on demand Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 270 Backup4all 5 11 9 Enable One Touch Backup support Use this option to enable the Plug and Backup functionality If the option is set you can choose which Backup job or Backup tag will be executed when the portable drive is plugged in Sometimes when the backup job or the backup tag is deleted or renamed the target backup cannot be executed In this case a dialog will be shown asking you to either create a new backup select another backup or disable the Plug and Backup functionality Detect Please connect your USB enclosure and make sure it is turned on and ready Press the Detect button to check the compatibility with the One Touch Backup feature If there is at least one compatible device a message will be shown listing all the disk partitions drives on the devices You will be informed if there are no compatible devices In this case the Enable One Touch Backup support option will have no effect even if it is set What to execute Backup job Use this option to select a backup job Backup tag Use this option to select a backup tag Exit application when finished use this option to close the application when the above selected action is finished Note
209. idle Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 115 When One time A On Idle Daily Weekly Monthly Run the job when computer is idle At user logon On idle Advanced Advanced On this page you can set the expiration date and time or the repeat frequency Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 116 Backup4all 5 5 13 3 When One time Advanced amp Daily Weekly Monthly C Expire 8 21 2014 2 33 35PM 3 Synchronize across time zones Advanced trigger settings At user logon C Repeat every 1 On idle For a duration of 1 C Run task as soon as possible after a scheduled start is missed Use this option to run missed tasks as soon as possible Wake the computer to run this task Use this option to wake the computer from sleep mode at the scheduled time Start the task only if the computer is idle for Use this option to indicate how long to wait when the computer is idle before the scheduled task starts Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic What On this page you can set what action to be executed Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 117 General When What to execute
210. ies 221 When One time A On Idle Daily Weekly Monthly Run the job when computer is idle At user logon Advanced Advanced On this page you can set the expiration date and time or the repeat frequency Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 222 Backup4all 5 7 10 3 When One time Advanced amp Daily Weekly Monthly C Expire 8 21 2014 2 33 35PM 3 Synchronize across time zones Advanced trigger settings At user logon C Repeat every 1 On idle For a duration of 1 C Run task as soon as possible after a scheduled start is missed Use this option to run missed tasks as soon as possible Wake the computer to run this task Use this option to wake the computer from sleep mode at the scheduled time Start the task only if the computer is idle for Use this option to indicate how long to wait when the computer is idle before the scheduled task starts Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic What On this page you can set what action to be executed Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 223 General When What to execute Backup Type C Clear backup before run Erase disk before backup
211. iew e Backup switches to Backup View e Statistics switches to Statistics View e Progress switches to Progress View Explore View Jobs Tags Layout Explore View ofS Collapse all Expand Expanc la Exclude from Sources all o Files amp Folders Files amp Folders e Restore e Latest version restores the latest version of the selected file folder to its original location without showing the Restore wizard e Latest version to restores the latest version of the selected file folder to a specified location without showing the Restore wizard Exclude from Sources excludes from backup sources the selected file folder Expand Folder expands the selected folder Expand all expands all folders Collapse all collapse all folders i a 9 View with Notepad ku m Compare with Source Restore Open Version File Versions File versions e Restore Version e Restore Version restore the selected file version to the original location e Restore To restore the selected file version to a specified location e Open open the selected file version View with Notepad open the selected file version with Notepad Compare with Source compare the selected file version with the current source file Compare Versions compare two file versions Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 68 Backup4all 5 Layout Filter Layout e Versions Pane if pressed will display the version
212. ifications will be displayed e Normal notifications will be shown for all basic actions e Verbose notifications will be shown for all actions e Custom user defined for which actions to display notifications Here is the list of all message types e Action started e Action finished with success Action finished with warnings e Action paused Action resumed Action stopped Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 291 e Action canceled e File or folder errors e Ask for backup label e Split mirror file confirmation e SFTP host key confirmation e Overwrite confirmation at restore e File not found at restore e File not found in zip at restore e FTP destination warnings e SFTP destination warnings e Backup folder creation errors e Disk prompts and warnings e CD DVD or Bluray destination warnings e Delete confirmation for smart backup e Azure destination warnings e Amazon S3 destination warnings e Force independent split warning e Backup source not available warning Select a message type to modify it Here are the options available for each message type e Show notification check this option if you want to see a notification message for the selected action e Popup noficiation check this option if you want the message to be shown in a popup window Otherwise it will be shown in the Backup4all status bar e Expires in set the expiration time for the selected message type By defa
213. ill be verified each time Limit file size to 2027 MB v Larger files will be split V publickey vi password vV keyboard interactive aes128 ctr v aes192 ctr vi aes256 ctr vi arcfour256 LA nerve tI IO vi hmac shal vV hmac md5 vi umac 64 openssh com vV hmac ripemd160 vV none zlib Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 171 7 3 8 e Limit file size to specify the maximum file size you want to have Please note that many SFTP servers does not allow you to upload files larger than 2 GB e Timeout you can set the time interval in seconds that is allowed for no data transfer before the transfer operation is interrupted and must be resumed Default is 15 seconds Authentication You can select which authentication methods will be used when backing up Available options publickey password and keyboard interactive The priority of these options can also be changed Encryption e Ciphers clear or select the check boxes to specify which ciphers you want to allow for encrypting SFTP sessions A Cipher is the algorithm s used for symmetric session encryption To give a cipher a lower priority rating select it with the mouse and then click the Down button e MACs clear or select the check boxes to specify which MACs you want to allow for encrypting SFTP sessions A MAC Message Authentication Code is the algorithm s use
214. ion pane is displayed e Expanded shows the navigator pane expanded e Collapsed shows the navigator pane collapsed e Off hides the navigator pane e Restore Default Layout restores the default layout of Backup4all Jobs S a Position Mode Jobs e Position indicate how the job view pane is displayed e Right shows the job view pane on the right e Bottom shows the job view pane on the bottom e Off hides the job view pane e Mode indicate how backup jobs are displayed e Card shows the backup jobs as cards e List shows the backup jobs in a list Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 5 2 Getting Started This window is displayed when you first run Backup4all You can also access this window if you select Getting Started from the File gt Tools menu There are two large buttons for backup and restore and a list of articles about Backup4all Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 72 Backup4all 5 Getting Started Select a task below to get started with Backup4all Backup Create new backup job from scratch or execute a existing backup job Restore Restore all files from a backup job or load a job in interface Links How to articles video tutorials or shortcuts to various tasks _ Show this dialog a
215. iption Account name Account_name Account key is set Yes Container name container Dest folder folder Filters Use https Yes Key is Shared Access Signature No Sources Customize Type Smart Full Differential Incremental Mirror Test Azure connection Compression Advanced Save and run Cancel Azure Select Azure option from the Destination window to be able to configure the backup to Azure If the current backup destination is not an Azure server you can change it by checking the Change destination to Azure option Destination Use existing configuration Use this option if you want to use an already defined Azure location in File gt Options gt Azure From the drop down list select the Azure location you want to use The advantage is that if you use the same Azure destination for multiple backup jobs and a modification is needed for destination you can change only the Azure configuration from File gt Options gt Azure and all backup jobs destinations will be updated Custom configuration Use this option to add a new Azure location or to edit an existing one by pressing the Edit configuration button Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 173 7 3 8 1 Description Here you can see a listing of the Azure settings If you configured a new Azure location or you edit an existing one you should use the Test Azure connection button to see if the Azur
216. irst partition is selected usually C Name your backup Backup name New Backup2 Where do you want to save your backup Local O Network OFP O SFTP Azure O Amazon Drive Local Disk C v Folder Users Info Documents My Backup4all Help Saving your backup locally Advanced mode Save Cancel J In the Folder where to perform the backup field by default it is the path to the My Backup4all 5 folder Users lt user name gt Documents MyBackup4all 5 You can click the Browse button and Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 136 Backup4all 5 6 2 2 select a destination folder of your choice where the backup will be stored If the destination drive is missing when the network is disconnected for instance or floppy CD DVD or Blu ray is missing an error message is shown containing the list of missing drives The user can choose Cancel to stop the backup process or Retry to check the drive again If the scheduler starts the backup then the system will retry as many times as set in the File gt Options gt Backup window and if still not possible to access the drive it will abort the backup process Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Network You can use a network destination for your backup by
217. is checked when errors warnings occur for the scheduled task a window will prompt the user that there were errors warnings and give an option to open the log file for more details Abort backup when source drives are not available If this option is checked the backup will be aborted when using sources from unavailable drives Ask for user input when backup cannot continue If this is checked the scheduled task will be paused when errors warning occur and the user will be prompted to take an action skip retry continue Backup4all uses by default the Windows Task Scheduler in order to run the scheduled tasks so you need to make sure that the Task Scheduler service is enabled on your computer Use the Windows Help in order to find out more information about scheduling a task using the Task Scheduler If you don t want to use the Windows Task Scheduler you can use Backup4all s standalone scheduler by selecting Use Standalone Scheduler Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 213 7 10 1 Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic General This is the fist page of the Scheduler Properties window which appears when you click on the Add or Edit button in the Scheduler window of Backup Properties or in the global Scheduler page
218. is is checked Backup4all will first delete the bkc file and all zip files associated with the current backup job and after that execute the action e Test you can create a shortcut to a test operation instead of a backup When Test is selected 1 2 5 4 the Backup Numbers box is displayed You can type in there the backup numbers you want to test The order you type them in is the order they will be tested in Use the character to test all backup numbers or the character to test only the last backup e Repair you can repair the backup by running a test detect the missing corrupted files from destination and back then up again Repair catalog only this option will detect the missing corrupted files from destination and will remove them from catalog so they will be backed up next time you run the backup e Cleanup you can create a shortcut for a scheduled Cleanup operation that will delete the selected backup numbers at the scheduled date When Cleanup is selected other options become available to filter the backup numbers that will be deleted e Newer than if checked backup numbers that are newer than the selected date will be deleted when the shortcut is double clicked e Older than if checked backup numbers that are older than the selected date will be deleted when the shortcut is double clicked e Older than fixed date backup numbers that are Older than a certain fixed date will be deleted when the shortcut is
219. isk before writing option e switch the write method between build in driver and UDF file system e use a custom prefix You can use two burners for UDF disc format Use SCSI Pass Through Direct layer SPTD and Use native Win32 interface SPTI This format can be used to write on CD R CD RW DVD R DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DVD DL HD DVD Blue ray Blu ray DL Use internal CD DVD or Blu ray burner Typically a backup to CD DVD or Blu ray disc performs additional steps shown in the status bar at the bottom of the main window burning finalizing and loading disc During the last operation the CD DVD or Blu ray disc is ejected and reloaded After this step the backup is tested and the CD DVD or Blu ray disc ejected again if these options are set Backup4all can also perform an additional Erase CD DVD Blu ray action for appropriate media rewritable CD DVD or Blu ray discs Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 60 Backup4all 5 4 3 4 4 Use Packet Writing If you do not wish to use the built in burner or your CD DVD or Blu ray device is not compatible you can use third party packet writing software Packet Writing Software Packet writing software can write only to CD RW DVD RW or DVD RW
220. isting folder By default this option is set to the My Documents MyBackup4all 5 folder of your Window login account profile Override temporary folder This folder is used by the compression engine to handle compressed files zip Only a full path is allowed The recommendation is to set the temporary directory on the hard disk partition with the most free space available You can use the Browse button to select an existing folder By default the option is set to the operating system s temporary folder Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup The Backup page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item contains settings related to the backup operations Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 261 General Prof ronas Change the backup options Startup Application folders Confirmations l Backup v Warn before canceling the backup v NTFS daylight saving correction Filters Logs and history Default compression filter Backup on demand Do not compress files of type zip rar mp3 avil 7z gif png jpeg jpg mpg gz CD DVD or Blu ray FTP SFTP Azure When destination not ready Retry times Wait seconds Amazon S3 Memory usage con Rec
221. isting of the SFTP settings If you configured a new SFTP location or you edit an existing one you should use the Test SFTP connection button to see if the SFTP settings are correct If the test was successful The SFTP connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Once you press the OK button Backup4all will try to connect to the SFTP server to see if a backup catalog already exists on the destination If the SFTP destination is not available a Cannot connect to the SFTP server message is displayed in the status bar bottom of the main window Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Edit configuration This window is shown when selecting Edit configuration from the Destination gt SFTP server window Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 169 General Existing configuration SFTP server Server name or IP Port Destination folder User name Password Private key None Key file Personal certificate store Bandwidth limitation Upload speed _ Download speed General Existing configuration lt New gt novaPDF com ee backup username Set password 2673d1b4abae704a ertificate manage Password protected If you want to add a new SFTP location
222. iving a backup destination without asking you every time what to do Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Introduction 13 Block backup This option is useful when you have large files changed frequently as PST or databases Using the block backup option allows you to back up only the changes inside the file not the whole large file Standard Zip Compression and zip64 support If the zip file size is less than 2 Gbytes Backup4all creates standard zip files This format is compatible with any zip utility available on the market Unlike other backup softwares for zip files greater than 2 Gbytes Backup4all uses zip64 technology which allows unlimited zip file size Backup Plugins In Backup4all you can load plugins to backup restore the settings of specific programs A plugin is actually an XML file that once imported in Backup4all adds a predefined backup For instance a backup plugin for Mozilla FireFox when loaded will automatically add in the Predefined Backup list an entry for Firefox so when defining a new backup job if that s selected the FireFox profiles will be added as source for the new backup Customized Zip Names You can customize name prefixes for the zip archives which store your backup versions Backup4all also supports file folder paths longer than 260 characters turn off file parsing Password Protection You can protect your ZIP files by setting a password for each backup job
223. kup job and open the Backup Properties window right click and select Properties or Ctrl P 2 Go to the Email page and check the Enable email notifications option 3 Optionally you can edit the default emails sent and also to attach the backup log to the email 4 Press OK to save your changes Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Getting Started 43 2 14 2 15 How to Configure One Touch Backup Some USB enclosures have a button to start the execution of an associated program If you have such a device you can configure Backup4all to execute a backup job or a backup tag when this button is pressed If your One Touch Backup device is not detected by Backup4all Backup4all is not natively compatible with the device you could use the command line parameters to create a command that can be associated to the One Touch button of your device See this section for details If the One Touch Backup option is enabled when the application starts and there is no backup job or backup tag set to be executed when the One Touch button of the USB enclosure is pressed the user will be asked to choose one from the options displayed in the One Touch Backup dialog e Create a new backup job for One Touch Backup
224. l hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Removable Network FTP server SFTP server Azure Amazon S3 Sources Filters Customize Type Smart Full Differential Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced Email Save and run When do you want to backup Scheduler Refresh Drag a column header here to group by that column Enabled Job type Scheduler 211 Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Scheduler lists all the available information about the scheduled tasks and allows you to Add Edit Delete and Schedule new tasks This only applies to the current backup job lt No scheduled jobs yet gt KI Options C Show warnings and errors C Abort backup when source drives are not available Ask for user input when backup cannot continue Cancel Right clicking an existing scheduled task or using the top buttons will display the following options e Add opens the Scheduler Properties window and allows you to add a new scheduled task e Edit e Properties opens the Scheduler Properties window where you can edit selected the scheduled task e User and password opens a window where you can set the username and the password Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland
225. lder where the logs are stored The path to the logs is set on the File Locations page of the Options window Unlimited size If checked the log folder size is not limited and its size will increase as needed After a long period the program will generate a large number of log files so you might want to clean up the log folder manually By default this option is not checked Restricted to If checked the log folder size is limited to the value set in the Size field below If the log file of the running backup job is larger than the limit it will still be stored in the log folder When the same operation will run again the previous log file will be deleted By default this option is checked The log folder size will be less or equal then the selected value By default this option is set to 50 MB You can set the desired unit from the drop down list Possible choices are Bytes KB kilobytes MB megabytes or GB gigabytes By default this option is set to MB Log Viewer Program User can choose which program to be used when opening the log files with Backup4all The available options are lt Default text editor gt lt Notepad gt or lt Wordpad gt User can also browse the computer to choose another program Log file extension User can change the extension of log files The available options are log and txt History Delete records older than If checked the history records older than the selected period will be deleted The a
226. ll take care of that Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 187 General Destination Local hard drive External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Removable Network FTP server f Smart backup type Smart v Select Smart as the default backup type Maximum space to take in the destination Limit backup size to gt of destination size Limit backup size to 5 GB SFTP server Azure Amazon S3 Sources Filters Customize Type Smart Full Differential Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced Email Scheduler Save and run Smart If the Smart type is not your default backup type you can check the Select Smart as the default backup type option Maximum space to take in the destination In time the disk space occupied by the backups will grow You can select the maximum size of the destination drive to be used for backups You can set the limit in percents or in MB GB If you want to use the entire destination drive only for backups set the limit to 100 By default the limit is set to 80 of the destination size Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 188 Backup4all 5 7 6 2 7 6 3 Full Full
227. ly decide which is the best action to perform by combining the backup types Full Backup Type Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Types 55 The full backup type will always backup all the files defined in the sources Incremental and differential backups will create a full backup first because they will back up the new files all files are new if the backup was never executed Differential Backup Type For a differential backup the system will always backup the differences from the last full backup regardless of the intermediate versions between the latest full and the current differential backup The first execution of a differential backup is a full backup because it backs up the new files and all the files are new if the backup was never executed Incremental Backup Type In case of incremental backups only the new and the modified files since last backup differential incremental or full backup are added to the backup Each file can have many versions stored in the backup files Backup4all can generate custom zip file names set a size limit for zip files and encrypt them For more details look at the Compression page from the Backup Properties window If a new backup job is created and the backup type is set to incremental or differential then when the backup job is first run the application will perform a full backup This also happens when the catalog bkc file is not found in
228. ly if the computer is idle for minutes Wait for idle for minutes lt Back Next gt Cancel When to run In this section you can specify the conditions that will trigger the task Use the Add Edit and Delete buttons to manage the triggers for this task Pressing Add or Edit button will open the Trigger Properties window When here you can select when to run the task one time daily weekly monthly at user logon or on idle The Synchronize across time zones option allows you to run the scheduled backups at the same hour if you change the time zone Select the recurrence option you want to use Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 216 Backup4all 5 One time A Define trigger properties Daily Weekly When to run Monthly Start 8 21 2013 Bv 2 33 35 PM be J Synchronize across time zones At user logon On idle Advanced On idle e One time select this option if you want the scheduler to be executed only one time When meria Chem 18 oe Daily p Weekly Monthly Run the job one time At user logon On idle Advanced Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 217 e Daily select this option if you want the scheduler to be executed daily When One time Weekly Monthly Run the job daily At user logon Daily On idle Advanced Recur every B
229. ly the scheduled tasks running One Touch Backup will be displayed e Alljobs only the scheduled tasks configured to run All jobs will be displayed In the scheduled tasks list you can drag any column to group the tasks by that column e Enabled if the checkbox is marked then the scheduled task will run if is unchecked it will not be executed e Name displays the name of the backup job as defined in its backup properties e Job Type displays the type of the job job or tag e Scheduler displays the scheduler used e Run in displays if the scheduler will be run using main application or command line application e Action shows the type of action associated with the scheduled task default smart full differential incremental cleanup test e Backup Type shows the type of the backup configured to be executed e Task file displays the name of the task file as you can find it on your computer e Status displays the status of the scheduled task e Next Run Time calculates the date and time when the scheduled task will run next e Last Run Time shows the date and time when the scheduled task last ran e Schedule shows the scheduler time and frequency e User shows the user name for which the job is scheduled to run Refresh e Refresh use this button to refresh the scheduled tasks list The scheduled tasks in the list can be sorted by clicking on the column headers The right click menu on the column header provides a han
230. maller than the size of a block this feature won t be applied Block backup feature can be used in Backup4all only if it was enabled before the first execution of the backup job That is because the blocks must be identified during the backup and used later when the source files are modified If no previous blocks exists there are no blocks to compare for later executions After the first execution of the backup job without the block backups option selected the Use block backup option is disabled and cannot be enabled for that job Save storage space To keep the number of stored zip files at a reasonable number the application provides three options Limit number of file versions Limit number of backups and Merge backups These options either delete older stored backups or perform an internal merge to keep the number of stored backups or file versions under the selected limit The Limit number of file versions Limit number of backups and Merge backups options cannot be used when the backup destination is on a removable media CD DVD or Blu ray disc etc By default the Limit number of file versions and the Limit number of backups options are not enabled This means that the system will keep all the stored backup versions If you choose to enable the Merge backups option when the limit is reached the system will perform an internal merge between the older versions keeping the number of stored backups equal to the specified limit the merge b
231. mber Wait option indicates how many seconds to wait between two consecutive attempts to access the destination location By default this option is set to 5 seconds Memory usage This option allows you to change the memory usage level You can move the memory indicator to a lower or a higher level Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Filters On the Filters page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item you can add edit or delete filters The filters created here can be found as global filters all over the application in New backup wizard or in Backup Properties Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 263 General Preferences Startup Application folders Backup Settings Hiberfil on System Drive use as exclude Show Auto Exclude Filters Pagefile on System Drive use as exclude Show Auto Exclude Logs and history Temporary Files use as exclude Show Auto Exclude Backup on demand Temporary Folders use as exclude Show Auto Exclude CD DVD or Blu ray FTP SFTP Add Azure Amazon 3 Description File name hiberfil sys Email AND Folder name SystemDrive Updates Show filter in New Backup Wizard Notifications Automatically add filter to new
232. mit number of backups and Merge backups options cannot be used when the backup destination is on a removable media floppy disk CD DVD Blu ray disc etc Customize zip name prefix Typically the name of the zip file is something like 1_C zip 1_D zip etc one zip for each drive The names of these zip files do not make much sense for the user but they can be customized by pressing the Insert tag button Following tags are predefined e Backup Name lt BACKUP NAME gt e Backup Number lt BACKUP NUMBER gt e Backup Type lt BACKUP TYPE gt e Backup Date lt DATE gt Backup Time lt TIME gt Backup Hour lt HOUR gt Backup Minute lt MINUTE gt Backup Second lt SECOND gt Backup Year lt YEAR gt Backup Month lt MONTH_MMM gt e Backup Month numeric lt MONTH_MM gt Backup Week lt WEEK gt Backup Day of Week lt DAY OF WEEK gt Backup Day lt DAY gt You can also add your text in the edit tag field Use the Preview button to see how the names of the zip files will look like Windows does not allow the following characters in the file name lt gt Therefore Backup4all will prompt you to change these characters if present in the Customize prefix of backup files field Smart backup type The smart backup type will perform full differential or incremental backups depending on the destination free disk space or the limit size you set in Backup Properties The smart backup type will automatical
233. n Full 3 Differential v Incremental Mirror e Backup date Date and time when the version was added to the backup e Backup No Number of the backup e File No Number of files included in that backup e Folder No Number of folders included in that backup e Comp Size The compressed size of the backup e Uncomp Size The uncompressed size of the backup e Label Label of the backup increment The backup versions in the list can be sorted by clicking on the column headers The right click menu on the column header provides a handy way to show hide unnecessary columns except the Type column which is grayed out Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 99 Using the Priority slider you can set the test execution speed compared to the rest of the running processes on your computer Default is Normal priority but there are other 4 priority levels Lowest priority Low priority High priority and Highest priority On Lowest priority the test process will consume the minimum amount of computer resources but will take the longer to complete while Highest priority will consume the highest amount of computer resources but will take the least to complete To test the selected backup versions press the Test button or press Cancel or the Escape key to close the window After finishing the test a pop up message is displayed with the test results e Testing lt backup name gt found no e
234. n Area Visualization mode Manual Run You can select the way Backup4all s main window will be displayed after a normal startup The options are Last window state Normal and Maximized Windows Startup You can select the way Backup4all s main window will be displayed after Windows starts The options are Last window state Minimized Normal and Maximized This setting is available only if Start at Windows startup is checked Scheduled Startup You can select the way Backup4all s main window will be displayed when a scheduled backup starts it The options are Last window state Minimized Normal and Maximized Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Application folders The Application folders page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item contains general settings of the program Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 259 General 3 Prof ronds 6 Configure the application folders Startup as es Backup C Override settings folder Info AppData Roaming Softland Backt Filters C Override job settings folder Info AppData Roaming Softland Backt Logs and history C Override tag settings folder Info AppData Roaming Softland Backt Backup on demand _ Override local catalog folder I
235. n includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Email Use this section to set email notifications to be sent when the backup is finished There are three types of email notifications depending on the backup status success warning and error email notifications Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 206 Backup4all 5 General Destination Local hard drive External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Removable Network FTP server SFTP server Azure Amazon S3 Sources Filters Customize Type Smart Full Differential Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced Scheduler Save and run Emails Send emails If checked then notification emails will be sent at the end of the backup test or cleanup operation to the specified email addresses email addresses must be separated by comma to be recognized This option can be checked unchecked only if the File gt Options gt Email window has the Enable email N gt Send emails after backup test or cleanup Sin G Email notifications are disabled because SMTP server is not set in Tools menu gt Options gt Email Emails Send emails Log Attach log file to email Compress the log file No encryption Strong encryption AES 128 bit strong Standard encryption Zip2 compatible Set password Email messages notification option checked Send emails to Specify the email address w
236. n success errors warnings Run program action before and or after backup Run program action only once Run at system shutdown Clean backup action with parameters Clear backup before executing a scheduled job Erase disc before backup Use local catalogs Play sound on success warning error Assign volume labels for removable media Assign label for each backup version Set backup thread priority LLL BRL KRKRKKKL LKR LL LKR LLL KER KELP GCG GGG BLK BKK LK KF KKK KK KK RELL LLL KK KK GFK KKK KF KF KK KF KK REL CLL GLK BGK GLK KK KK BGK GLK KF Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland ad Introduction 7 One Touch Backup feature Independent spanned backups Back up empty folders Delete Sources after successful backup Create backup log Create backup catalog file Run backup at log on OR log off Free Backup Plugins Possibility to set memory usage for backing up Plug n Backup Browsable file and folder selection CK QLLRLL RK KR RE RL LLL ERLE RERXLL LLL LCG CCL GRC LLL LR Backup types NEW Smart backup Mirror backup without compression Mirror backup with individual file compression zip Full backup Store multiple versions for full backup type Differential backup Store multiple versions for differential backup type True incremental backup Store multiple versions for incremental backup type Limit number of backup versions K KXKKKXKK IX BEKXK KKK LKR 8K KK
237. n user This way if there are 3 people using the same computer and each logging in through a different account Backup4all will have different settings and jobs for each account This can be selected upon installation too in the Select Default Settings step These settings are kept ina file whose location is customizable All Users If this is selected the settings used in Backup4all including backup jobs are available for all users on the computer where it s installed This way if there are 3 people using the same computer and each logging in through a different account Backup4all will have the same settings and jobs for each Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 254 Backup4all 5 11 2 account kind of like a shared profile This can be selected upon installation too in the Select Default Settings step These settings are kept in a file whose location is customizable Security Backup4all allows you to lock the program interface using a password Press the Set password button to add or change the password Near this button the security status is displayed No password or Password protected When opening the program s interface if the interface is locked you will be asked for the password To remove the password press the Set password button type the old password and press OK Language In the Language section you can select the language of the program interface by choosing another one fr
238. n you choose other backup types restore jobs may take longer Description of the Full Backup Type It would be ideal to make full backups all the time because they are the most comprehensive and are self contained However the amount of time it takes to run full backups often prevents us from using this backup type Full backups are often restricted to a weekly or monthly schedule although the increasing speed and capacity of backup media is making overnight full backups a more realistic proposition Full backups if you have the time to perform them offer the best solution in data protection In effect a single backup can provide the ability to completely restore all backed up files However you should be aware of a significant security issue Each full backup contains an entire copy of the data If the backup media were to be illegally accessed or stolen the hacker or thief would then have access to an entire copy of your data Advantages e Restore is the fastest Disadvantages e Backing up is the slowest e The storage space requirements are the highest compared to incremental or differential backups Full Backup Type in Backup4all Backup4all supports the full backup type and offers a solution for the storage space requirement issue You can use the Yes limit number of file versions and Yes limit number of backups options to reduce the backup size The output of a full backup is a container file which is created with zip comp
239. nation Network FTP server Versions preview SFTP server Options Azure Fast mirror copy only new or modified files Amazon S3 V Create full paths including drive letter v Sources Copy files in a subfolder Remove excluded or deleted files from backup Only if the source drive is available Customize Type Smart Other Zip the files Copy NTFS security permissions Copy NTFS alternate file streams Full Differential Allow file splitting when spanning Incremental Sort mirror files for optimized spanning Compression Advanced Save and run Cancel Mirror If the Mirror type is not your default backup type you can check the Select Mirror as the default Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 192 Backup4all 5 backup type option Create subfolder s in destination Use this option to create a subfolder in the destination The name of the folder can be customized by pressing the Insert tags button Following tags are predefined e Backup Name lt BACKUP NAME gt e Backup Number lt BACKUP NUMBER gt e Backup Type lt BACKUP TYPE gt e Backup Date lt DATE gt e Backup Time lt TIME gt e Backup Hour e Backup Minute e Backup Second e Backup Year lt YEAR gt e Backup Month lt MONTH_MMM gt e Backup Month numeric lt MONTH_MM gt e Backup Day lt DAY gt e Backup Week lt WEEK
240. ncomp Total size of backup comp uncomp Number of backups Last backup status Files folders in backup Next scheduled backup Next scheduled tag backup Changes since last backup Files Folders 13 1 4 5 0 1 13 0 Total files folders to backup N U M Total size to backup N U M Free disk space on destination 7 1 2013 1 44 05 PM 00 00 15 35 58 MB 35 58 MB 100 7 1 2013 1 44 05 PM 00 00 15 35 58 MB 35 58 MB 100 36 16 MB 35 58 MB 101 1 Last backup was successful 23 23 added on last backup Not scheduled Eel Files folders to backup Smart Files Folders New N Unchanged U Modified M Excluded 14 35 58 MB 169 06 GB This view provides statistical information about the last backup performed and calculates statistics about the next backup based on the current backup job configuration Information list Last backup on Date and time of the last backup Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 87 Last backup duration Shows the duration of the last backup execution Last backup size Shows the size of the last backup compressed size of all files present in backup uncompressed compression percentage Last full backup on not displayed for mirror backup type The date and time when the last full backup was executed Note that the first backup is always a full backup even if the backup type is set to incremen
241. nd the User name and optional Password for the FTP site USER user firewalluser hostname PASS pass firewallpass Sends the command USER user proxyuser host then the command PASS pwd proxypwd or optionally PASS pwd e Transparent Sends the User name and optional Password defined in the proxy settings followed immediately by the FTP server User name and optional Password 3 Enter the name or IP address for the proxy server firewall in the Host name or IP field 4 Enter the port number in the Host Port field 5 Enter the user name and password needed for this proxy connection in the User name and Password fields 6 Press OK and then test the connection Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Using SSL Encryption When you connect through FTP to a remote computer you send the username and password in clear unencrypted text Also when you backup your files to a remote computer the information is not sent directly to that computer Instead it is routed through several other computers to get there Anyone along the route can access what you are sending including your username and password if the data is not encrypted If an unauthorized person has access to this data your account and the remote system you have access to may no longer be secure Backup4all solves t
242. ne is created with that name If that field is left blank Backup4all will automatically create a folder using the name of the backup job and place the backup files in there User In this field you can enter the user name for the FTP server Password Type the password used for FTP server access Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland New Backup Wizard 139 6 2 4 There are FTP servers that allow anonymous access public FTP servers You can connect to these types of FTP servers using as user name Anonymous and your email address as password It is not recommended to backup important files to public FTP servers By pressing the Test button you can check to see if the settings you have entered are correct If the test was successful The ftp connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic SFTP Backup4all supports backing up to a remote computer or device using SFTP SSH File Transfer Protocol connection This is a practical backup destination because the backed up data can be easily accessed from any other computer with an Internet connection Select the SFTP option from the Where do you want to save your backup section to be able to configure the backup to SFTP Name your b
243. nfo AppData Roaming Softland Backt CD DVD or Blu ray C Override log folder C Users Info AppData Roaming Softland Backt Gee eeo FTP _ Override plugins folder nfo AppData Roaming Softland Backt SFTP _ Override SFTP host keys folder nfo AppData Roaming Softland Backt Azure C Override default destination folder AN Info Documents My Backup4all t2 Amazon 53 _ Override temporary folder eTEMP Email Updates Notifications Passwords Override settings folder This is the folder where the program s settings are kept You can use the Browse button e to select an existing folder By default this option is set to the AppData Softland Backup4all 5 folder of your Window login account profile Override job settings folder This is the folder where the job s settings are kept You can use the Browse button e to select an existing folder By default this option is set to the AppData Softland Backup4all 5 folder of your Window login account profile Override tag settings folder This is the folder where the tag s settings are kept You can use the Browse button e to select an existing folder By default this option is set to the AppData Softland Backup4all 5 folder of your Window login account profile Override local catalog folder This is the folder where the cached catalog files bkc are saved You can use the Browse button el to select an existing folder By default this option is set to
244. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 229 4 Do you want to filter the filOS cece eeceeeee eee eeeeee ee eeeneee seen nnee eee en sees seeesneaeeeenseaeseeesseeeeeenseceeeeenas 231 5 Preview the files to be reStOred ccccccccsssseeeeeeeenenseneneeeeeeensnaeneeeeaeeaesaenseeeeeoeeasenseeeseoeenseneees 233 Part IX File Filtering 236 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 6 Backup4all 5 1 OVEINVIEW E N E EEE E A EEE E E E NE EE E A EE E E EE 236 De MS L EES AN E TA E E A E E A EE A T A 237 Part X Command Line 243 T Backup rwie EE AA ASA EA E AE E 243 PA o a E E E E E ceuteu deneupieedecess s 245 3 Repair sorpa aana AATE one eet ae EAE EEEE ec ead eee ee 246 AS VROSTONC ces fase TE cca c cet oe teed Sean space T A T A Sunterstendeeusunepeecestnates 248 5 ETTET o 22 28 E tec csnctecbecdcegciacs sdegeccanch seqedssattennedeceendedieadescecarsusecssdcencccusvsasdseceerteds 249 Part XI Options 253 Wie General Scroar aaaea aE TEE Lea TE AELITA cea poses rece ctepPicaetees 253 2 Prefere S inesi aeaaaee aa taae a aa a aoi Aaa ea aa aeaaaee nandai 254 Bi SCART E E EE E E E A E E suse esceceecbunvs setyenteecettie 257 4 Application TOlders ti ii acc ccc0 ceases seeesccct cic decd cecedtee dened eden deeecece eencdccnseeue eearri ainaani Aeara 258 is MBACP a ace acne oes cs oa E euncaneesdascuancnucfesteetaa 260 E e E TE EA seen Msibek lee TE E tu sdea icactacdecdavdasbss
245. notices This program includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2011 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Help 307 and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgmen
246. now the password for this backup number you can e press Skip backup to go to the next archive the restore may be incomplete in this case e press Stop restore to stop the whole process the restore will be incomplete because only a part of the files were restored Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic How to Schedule a Backup You can schedule a backup either from the Backup Properties window or from the Schedulers window Open the Backup Properties window by pressing the Properties button lal from the application s toolbar and go to Scheduler page or open the Schedulers overview window by pressing the Scheduler button from the bottom of the left side column The difference between the two methods is that the first displays the scheduled tasks only for the selected backup job while the second will show you the scheduled tasks for all the backup jobs and tags Backup4all uses the Windows Task Scheduler in order to run the scheduled backups By default the option to Run only if the user is logged on is selected If you want the task to run when the user is logged off you need to select the Run whether the user is logged on or not option You can use the Windows Help in order to find out more information about scheduling a task using the Task Scheduler
247. nt Windows login account in order to have them correctly set up Tip e if you want to open an ini file of a current version instead you can use the File gt Open backup Ctrl O option this will recreate the backup job opened if is not in the backup list already Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic System Tray When is Backup4all shown in the system tray Backup4all icon is also shown in tray if the Show tray icon option from File gt Options gt Startup is checked If this option is selected the tray icon will remain in taskbar after you close the main interface This way you can easily open the main interface Show Backup4all Suspend system Stop all running Cancel all running Show messages The right click menu of the tray icon allows to e Show Backup4all shows Backup4all s main window e Suspend system will pause all the Backup4all activity e Stop all running will stop all running actions e Cancel all running will cancel all running actions e Show messages will display all active notification messages Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 130 Backup4all 5 The left click menu of the tray icon displays the following options e Backup4all will open the main interface If there are backup jobs in progres
248. o removable media after each media item written the backup test is performed for spanned backups When backing up to FTP the XCRC command can be used if supported by server This speeds up the testing as Backup4all will verify the backup based on the CRC information received from server If Azure or Amazon is used as the backup destination the test will be made based on the CRC information and the files won t be downloaded again after backup Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Feature Matrix Backup4all comes in three editions Lite Standard and Professional Professional is the full edition with all features enabled while Standard and Lite are the limited functionality editions Below you can find a comparison of the features available in each edition Backup4all Portable Edition is a custom version of Backup4all that works only on portable devices Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Introduction 15 Interface NEW Customizable ribbon interface NEW Show job details in card list mode NEW Navigation pane NEW Notification messages NEW Windows Explorer contextual right click menu Start application at Windows startup Minimize application to system tray Add sources with drag drop Explore View Backup View
249. o remove a refined filter select the folder select the filter and press the Delete button Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland File Filtering 237 9 2 File Filter The Edit file filter item window is shown every time a file filter restriction is added or modified It can be opened by pressing the Add button from the Filters page New Backup Wizard Backup Properties Restore Wizard window or Files gt Options or the Edit button if filters are already defined What do you want to do Create new Create new starting from Use existing Hiberfil on System Drive use as exclude General Filter name New filter configuration File name _ Enable Folder name _ Enable What do you want to do User can Create new filter Create new starting from existing filter or Use existing filter The existing filters are listed in the drop down list and they can be added edit or deleted from File gt Options gt Filters General In the Filter name field you can type the name of the created filter By default the New filter configuration name is assigned If you use an existing filter the name of that filter is used Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Sof
250. o repaired after the current backup version is tested if there were files not correctly backed up or missing from the backup destination Those files will be removed from the backup catalog and they will be backed up again next time the backup is Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 201 executed Remove from catalog all files with errors This option selected by default is used to also repair the backup catalog during the test after backup If there are files backed up with problems and the test on those files fails they will be removed from the backup catalog Next time you run the backup Backup4all will try to back up those files again Delete sources after successful backup If this option is checked the backup sources will be deleted after performing the backup This option is disabled if the Test after backup option is not enabled Ask for backup label before execution If this option is set a window will be shown and will prompt the user to enter the label description of the backup increment If you do not want to give a label to the current backup leave the edit control empty Check the Don t label next backups if you do not want to see this window when the current backup job is executed in the future This feature is particularly useful for incremental backup types when the label can be seen as a milestone for all files backed up These labels are visible on the Versions page of
251. of the application This allows you to add or edit a scheduled task for the current backup job When What Define scheduler properties Execute C Show main application Close after run Scheduler With Windows scheduler User account WIN8 64BIT Info Run only if the user is logged on Run whether the user is logged on or not At system shutdown Priority Priority Notificati _ Force all notifications to timeout v Cancel Execute Show main application Use this option if you want the main application window to be shown when the scheduled task is executed By default this option is unchecked and the scheduled tasks will run in background Close after run If this option is checked Backup4all will be closed after the task is executed This option applies only if the application was started by the current scheduled task Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 214 Backup4all 5 7 10 2 Scheduler We use only the Windows scheduler no more built in scheduler which can be set up with or without a password depending if you want the task to run when no user is logged on or only when there is an user logged on With Windows scheduler e Run only if the user is logged on the task will run under the specified user account only if there is an user logged on e Run whether the user is logged on or not the task will run even if there is no user logged on Password press
252. ole file is compressed in the temporary file it is added to the final zip file This option has effect only when backing up to internal hard drives and LAN In all other cases this option is ignored When backing up to LAN drives it is recommended to check this option and uncheck Always use temporary folder to create zip files option When backing up to internal hard drives it is recommended to uncheck both options By default this option is not checked Encrypt the zip files No encryption The zip files created are not protected by password for unauthorized access Strong encryption AES This is the Advanced Encryption Standard the best choice in zip protection but recognized only by the latest version of third party zip applications Backup4all supports AES encryption in three different strengths e 128 bit strong size of the encryption key is 128 bits This provides significantly better security than standard zip 2 0 encryption e 192 bit stronger size of the encryption key is 192 bits e 256 bit strongest size of the encryption key is 256 bits This is the strongest encryption method for zip files and it provides the best security Standard encryption Zip2 compatible Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 197 This is the standard Zip 2 0 encryption an older encryption technique that provides relatively weak security compared to AES encryption Zip 2 0 encryption format
253. om the drop down list Only the languages that were installed with the program are displayed The language of the interface changes only after the Options window is closed by pressing the OK button The selected language is kept as long as you don t change it or it becomes invalid due to software updates The text box below the Language field shows details about the selected language like translator name and contact information Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Preferences The Preferences page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item contains settings related to the display of the Toolbar menu Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 255 General Preferences oy Change layout and other preferences Startup Application folders J d C Minimize the Ribbon C Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon Customize ribbon Backup Filters Logs and history Backup on demand mes CD DVD or Blu ray Default view Explore FTP Show explorer icons C Hide empty folders on expand all SFTP C Show context menu Azure Amazon S3 eet Email Auto Updates Custom Notifications External program Passwords Difference viewer Other Warn when insecure passwords are used S
254. ommended memory for backup Updates Notifications Passwords Confirmations Warn before canceling the backup If checked a confirmation message will be displayed when a backup is canceled before being completely executed By default this option is checked NTFS daylight saving correction The Windows NT File System NTFS reports wrong file times after the clock changes according to daylight saving time rules As a consequence the program sees these files as changed and backs them up When you check this option these files will not be reported as modified By default this option is checked Default compression filter This default filter is applied to new backup jobs by default to increase the compression performance It defines what types of files to be stored uncompressed in the zip file These are files that are already compressed e g zip rar mp3 or avi and using the zip compression on them wouldn t result in a smaller sized backup This can also be modified individually from each backup job s Properties gt Types gt Advanced window in the Filters box When destination not ready Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 262 Backup4all 5 11 6 The options from this group affects scheduled backups The first number Retry option indicates how many times the application tries to access the destination location if it is not available By default this option is set to 3 attempts The second nu
255. ommended to use the Test Azure connection button to see if the Azure settings are correct Once you press the OK button Backup4all will try to connect to the Azure server to see if a backup catalog already exists on the destination If the Azure destination is not available a Cannot connect to the Azure server message is displayed in the status bar bottom of the main window In the File gt Options gt Backup window you can set the number of retries and the time between the retries when the Azure server is unavailable the When destination not ready section Recommendations for backing up to Azure 1 After each change to the Azure configuration be sure to use the Test function 2 If you backup important data to a remote location using Azure encrypt the zip files for increased security In this case even if another person manages to gain unauthorized access to your Azure account your files will still be protected Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic How to Backup to Amazon 3 Backup4all supports backing up to Amazon S3 This is a practical backup destination because the backed up data can be easily accessed from any other computer with an Internet connection Defining Amazon configuration Before using Amazon as a destination for backing up you should define
256. omputer with an Internet connection Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 162 Backup4all 5 General k FTP D stiiati n B Save backup to an FTP server Local hard drive External hard drive EIE servet v Change destination to FTP CD DVD or Blu ray Removable Destination Network Use existing configuration novaPDF FTP a FTP server Custom configuration Edit configuration SFTP server Azure Host and port ftp novapdf com 21 Remote directory backup Sources User password is set Yes i Limit upload speed KB No Filters Limit download speed KB No SSL encryption level No SSL Use passive mode Yes Type Use passive IP No Use XCRC when testing if available Yes Smart Resume uploads downloads if available Yes Full Maximum file size 1 98 GB Timeout seconds 15 Differential Transfer mode Binary Amazon S3 Customize Incremental Mirror Test FTP connection Compression Advanced Save and run FTP server Select the FTP server option from the Destination window to be able to configure the backup to FTP If the current backup destination is not an FTP server you can change it by checking the Change destination to FTP option Destination Use existing configuration Use this option if you want to use an already defined FTP location in File gt Options gt FTP From the drop down list select the FTP location you want to use The advantage is that if you use the
257. on The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic How to Run a Backup Job t Backup To start a backup click the Backup button i from the application s toolbar or press F6 You can also right click the backup job and select the Backup action to start If an error occurred during backup and the backup was aborted the Error icon appears in front of the backup job Read the log files from Jobs tab History section View Log for details about the errors The icon will disappear when the backup is executed again and the execution is successful If one or more files could not be backed up not enough user rights etc then the Warning icon appears in front of the default backup job icon after the backup finished Read the log files from Jobs tab History section View Log for details about the files that were not backed up The Warning icon will disappear when the backup is executed again and all files were backed up Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic How to Manage Backup Jobs Copy an Existing Backup Configuration You can use the Duplicate Backup Ctrl L option from the Jobs tab to create a duplicate of the selected backup job and after that you can easily modify its configuration
258. on startup Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 290 Backup4all 5 11 16 Notifications On the Notifications page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item you can configure the expiration time for each notification message type General Configure notification details for active profile Preferences Startup Application folders Backup Active profile Filters Me ae Action started Action finished with success Expiration 2 minutes a Logs and history 2 minutes RSRF Backup on demand Action finished with warnings 2 minutes CD DVD or Blu ray FTP SFTP Azure Amazon S3 Action paused Action resumed Action stopped Action cancelled File or folder errors Ask for backup label 2 minutes i Split mirror file confirmation 2 minutes Email SFTP Host key confirmation Updates Overwrite confirmation at restore 2 minutes Notifications File not found at restore 2 minutes Passwords Modify selection 2 minutes CRRRERKKKKS AS SSS SSS v Show notification C Popup notification V Expires in Profiles Active profile Here you can select which profile to be used e Silent no not
259. ons files with ico extension or bitmaps files with bmp extension can be added to the list To remove an icon from the list you have to select it and then click on the Delete button By default each new backup job icon will be the first icon from the Change Icon list Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 152 Backup4all 5 7 3 Destination The Destination page defines where the backup archive will be stored General fal Destination gi Where do you want to save your backup Destination Local hard drive External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Select the destination you want to use Local hard drive External hard drive Network OCD DVD or Blu ray FTP server Removable media USB flash drive floppy SFTP server O Meek O FIP server Azure O SFTP server Amazon S3 Azure storage carted Amazon 3 storage Removable Filters Customize Type Smart Full Differential Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced Save and run Destination Valid destination types Local hard drive External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Removable media USB flash drive floppy Network FTP server SFTP server e Azure storage e Amazon S3 s
260. ons based on file dates and times To enable options in this section check the Filter by date option Filters in this section can be applied by selecting one of the available date filters e date accessed e date and time accessed e date modified e date and time modified e date created e date and time created You can compare these dates and times with a fixed date or a relative date today yesterday one week ago or one month ago Comparison operators available lt gt date and time not equal to fixed or relative date lt date and time less than or equal to fixed or relative date gt date and time greater than or equal to fixed or relative date lt date and time less than fixed or relative date gt date and time greater than fixed or relative date in interval date and time in a particular time interval between the Start date and End date File size This section provides the possibility to build restrictions based on the file size To enable the options in this section check the Filter by size option You can enter a file size in the Size field and select a measurement Unit The filter will compare the file size on disk with the size you enter using the comparison filters you selected e lt gt file size on disk not equal to the value in the Size field e lt file size on disk less than or equal to the value in the Size field e gt file size on disk greater than or equal to the value in the Size field
261. ons can be used to trigger the creation of a new full backup e Automatically make full backup if all increments exceed of full backup size default is 50 not checked e Automatically make full backup if all increments exceed default is 100 MB not checked The system calculates the file sizes for the incremental and if the selected condition is met it performs a full backup Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Mirror Backup What is Mirror Backup A mirror backup is identical to a full backup with the exception that the files and folders are not compressed in zip files and they cannot be protected with a password A mirror backup is most frequently used to create an exact copy of the backup source data It has the benefit that the backup files can also be readily accessed using tools like Windows Explorer Description of the Mirror Backup Type A mirror backup is an exact copy of the selected folders and files at a given time Mirror backup is the fastest backup method because it copies files and folders to the destination without any compression However the increased speed has its drawbacks it needs larger storage space and it cannot be password protected Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Types 53 3 7
262. or InCD or the Joliet format Backup4all also has the possibility to erase CD RW DVD RW Blu ray media FTP Backup You can backup your files to remote locations using the FTP service with SSL support active passive transfer modes firewall support XCRC tests You just have to select FTP as destination enter the connection details and you are ready to backup to FTP SFTP Backup You can backup your files to remote locations using the SFTP service Select SFTP as destination enter the configurations and you are ready to backup to SFTP Amazon Backup You can also use Amazon as backup destination Select Amazon as backup destination and type the Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 12 Backup4all 5 Access key ID the Secret Access Key and the Bucket in order to configure the Amazon destination Azure Backup You can backup your files to Azure destination Select Azure as backup destination and type the Account name the Key and the Container to configure the Azure destination Backup Destination You can store the backup in a local folder on another computer in the same LAN on media such as CD R CD RW DVD R DVD R DVD RW DVD RW Blu ray Blu ray RW on USB drives or other removable media on FTP SFTP Amazon or Azure Extra Actions Perform extra actions before and or after backup execution Create shortcut for backup job tag You can create a shortcut of a backup job or backup tag to a d
263. or your Amazon S3 account e Secret Access Key In this field you have to enter the Secret Access Key for your Amazon S3 account e Bucket In this field you have to enter the bucket you want to use as destination You can also create a new bucket if you type its name and press Create button Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 286 Backup4all 5 e Folder In this field you have to enter the folder where you want to store the backups If the folder does not exist it will be created Note If you configured a new Amazon S3 location or you edit an existing one you should use the Test button to see if the Amazon S3 settings are correct If the test was successful The Amazon S3 connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 11 14 Email On the Email page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item you can set configurations necessary to send emails General Define SMTP server properties Preferences Startup Application folders Emol ees V Enable email notifications Backup Filters SMTP Server Logs and history Server name or IP smtp gmail com Send test email Backup on demand Port 25 a CD DVD or Blu ray FTP SFTP Email a
264. ored Check the status of the files in the Explore view of the main screen Choose filter files and restore any version Lets you specify which version of the files will be restored For example you might restore all files in their original state from the first backup number Restore excluded and deleted files If this option is checked the latest version of all files will be restored even if these files were excluded from the backup Preview files at the end of wizard If checked a preview page with the files to be restored will be shown at the end of wizard Using the slider from the bottom of the Restore Wizard window you can set the restore execution priority compared to the rest of the running processes on your system For example setting the priority to Highest priority will determine the system to allocate most of its resources for the restore execution Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic What do you want to restore This is the second step of the Restore Wizard It appears only for Choose files and restore from the latest version Choose filter files and restore the latest version and Choose filter files and restore from any version options Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Restore Wizard What do you want to restore
265. ormed backup job upon its completion Enabling email notifications 1 Open File gt Options gt Email 2 Check the Enable email notifications box 3 Enter the following details SMTP Server specify the name or IP address of the SMTP server used for sending the mail example smtp novapdf com in the Server name or IP field and a Port number for it usually is 25 you can also use Secure Socket Layer when connecting to the SMTP server Email addresses you must specify the email address used to send the email From field and optionally a Reply To email address Authentication if the SMTP server requires authentication check the Server requires authentication box and enter an user name and a password Dial up connection if you are using a dial up connection select from the drop down box a method that Backup4all should use to be able to send emails automatically connect it will connect without user assistance or manually connect it will require user assistance to enable the connection 4 Click on the Send test email button from the SMTP Server section and enter the email address where you want to receive the notification Once you press OK you should receive a test email If you didn t receive it you must revise the settings you configured 5 Press OK to save your settings Sending email notifications You have to enable separately for each backup job the option to send emails To do so follow these steps 1 Select a bac
266. ossible to set different passwords for the same backup job so the backup may contain zip files with different passwords Make sure that you remember all passwords that have been used for a backup job or you will not be able to restore your files By default Backup4all stores the passwords on the local Windows account in order not to ask you the password every time you want to run a new backup or to test it from the local computer You can also protect the stored passwords using a master password or you can chose not to store any passwords You can change these settings if you go to File gt Options gt Passwords How to Remove the Password In the Backup Properties gt Compression page go to Encrypt the zip file section select the No Encryption option and enter the password that you used in the Old password field You cannot remove the password if you don t provide the old one If you have the Zip 2 compatible encryption or AES encryption option selected you can also Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Getting Started 31 2 7 remove the password by entering the Old password and leave the New password and Confirm new password fields empty Using Passwords when Restoring During the restore process of backups with password protection if you do not use the option to store the passwords in the local Windows account the Enter Password dialog will appear Enter the password and press OK If you do not k
267. otation backup scheme with two or more external hard drives By default this option is not checked Enable disk spanning The option is effective when there is not enough space to copy all files in the external drive destination If checked the application will copy files to the destination until a file will not fit Then it will ask you for another drive to continue with the rest of the files If the option is not set Backup4all will stop when the destination drive is full By default this option is not checked Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic CD DVD or Blu ray You can select a CD DVD or Blu ray drive as destination for backup Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 156 Backup4all 5 General Destination o Save backup to a CD DVD or Blu ray disk Local hard drive External hard drive CD DVD or Bluray a CD DVD or Blu ray v Change destination to CD DVD or Blu ray Removable Destination Network CD DVD or Blu ray drive CD Drive D test 6543_1 FTP server Folder A SFTP server _ Erase before writing Paure Write method Amazon S3 Burn using built in driver Speed Maximum speed Filters Use third party packet writing software Customize Type Smart Sources Volume label C Use custom prefix
268. ou can approve or deny the request Hang up when finished If checked the dial up connection will be closed after the notification email is sent Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Updates On the Updates page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item you can configure Backup4all when to check for updates Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 289 General Preferences bees Program updates Startup Application folders cle soca Backup Check mode Manual Filters Frequency Daily _ Check at application startup Logs and history Backup on demand CD DVD or Blu ray FTP Azure Amazon S3 Email Notifications Passwords Conceal Check for updates Check mode User can choose one of these modes e Manual user will manually check for new updates This option is selected by default e Reminder the program will remind you with the selected frequency to check for new updates e Automatic the program will automatically check for new updates with the selected frequency Frequency User can set the frequency for Backup4all to remind or to automatically check for new updates Check at application startup If checked the program will check for new updates at applicati
269. ou will be asked to re activate the application within 15 days Register In File gt Help under Registration information section you have the Register online link to be used Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Help 305 12 2 for registering on our website Changing the product key will also open the Activate application wizard where you can use another key Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Deactivation Deactivate this product key option from the same page can be used when moving the license to another computer be Q Manually deactivate acua Online deactivation failed Please select one of the manual deactivation options A Send deactivation request by email wa 3 The request will be sent using the default email client Save deactivation request file If you want to later upload the deactivation request file to deactivate backup4all com or send it by email to activate backup4all com Do not deactivate the application If you lost your registration key please send us an email to Sales Support You should specify your purchase information purchase number and approximate date the name or company name and email address you used to buy your copy of Backup4all We will send to you the
270. out needing to run Backup4all e f used with Zip the files option a selective restore is faster than in any other backup type with zip Disadvantages e If not zipped it needs more storage space than any other backup type e Cannot track different versions of files Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup Types in Backup4all How are the Backup Types Implemented in Backup4all Backup4all creates two main types of backups e Backup types with zip compression e Mirror backup type User can change the backup type from the Type page in Backup Properties or from a specific type page by checking the box to select that type as default backup type Backup Types with Zip Compression Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 54 Backup4all 5 Full differential and incremental backup use zip compression to reduce the size of the stored backup versions To keep the number of stored zip files at a reasonable number the application provides three options Yes limit number of file versions Yes limit number of backups and Merge backups These options either delete older stored backups or perform an internal merge to keep the number of stored backups or file versions under the selected limit The Yes limit number of file versions Yes li
271. p job or backup tag will be executed If Backup4all is not started it will start automatically If it is already started but minimized it will show a pop up window or the main window while backing up depending on the settings from the Options window When the backup finishes Backup4all is minimized if the Hide when finished option is checked If the main window of the application was already open when the One Touch button was pressed the Hide when finished option will be ignored Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 44 Backup4all 5 2 16 Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic How to Enable Detailed Logging Backup4all allows you to log detailed information about the operations executed backup restore or test Practically this means that beside the warnings and errors the log file will contain detailed information about all files handled by the backup restore or test process To enable detailed logging 1 Go to File menu and open the Options window 2 Switch to the Logs and history page 3 Check the Log detailed information option 4 Check the Include summary in log option this will include in the log file all the information available from the Summary view 5 Additionally you can limit the size of the log folder too
272. p must be processed which could result in a lengthy restore job Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Types 47 3 2 Mirror Backup A mirror backup is identical to a full backup with the exception that the files are not compressed in zip files and they cannot be protected with a password A mirror backup is most frequently used to create an exact copy of the backup data It has the benefit that the backup files can also be readily accessed using tools like Windows Explorer Using the mirror backup type you can also choose to zip each file individually preserving the folder structure This allows you to use the zip compression and encryption features Block backup You can use block backup option to copy only the modified parts of the source files This is useful for large files as PST or database files as only the modified part of the file will be backed up instead of backing up the whole large file You can use automatic block size or you can manually set the block size Note The block backup option must be enabled from the first backup execution otherwise you won t be able to use it on that backup job If you already have a backup job and want to use block backup you ll have to create a new backup job Save storage space In Backup4all you have two options for saving the storage space You can use the Yes limit number of file versions and Yes limit maximum number of stored backups to op
273. pane on the bottom of the Explore view Filter show hide the new files to be backed up show hide the unchanged files B _ show hide the modified files show hide the excluded files x show hide the deleted files Backup View EYE Restore Test View z Backup Log Backups Backups e Restore e Restore restore the selected version to the original location e Restore To restore the selected version to a specified location e Test test the selected backup version e View Backup Log open the backup log for that backup execution rout Backup View Z Expand All rh R ys 2 Collapse All Files amp Folders Files amp Folders e Restore e Restore restore the selected file to the original location e Restore To restore the selected file to a specified location e Open open the selected file e View with Notepad open the selected file with Notepad e Full Expand expands all folders from the selected backup e Expand all expands all folders e Collapse all collapse all folders Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 69 F Filter Files Layout Filter Layout 7 e Versions Pane if pressed will display the version pane on the bottom of the Explore view Filter show hide the new files to be backed up E show hide the modified files show hide the excluded files 7 Filter files open the Filters window History iS v B Histor
274. pes smart backup full backup differential backup incremental backup and mirror backup Below you can find an overview of these types Smart Backup Smart backup is the default backup type It will start with a full backup type and then it decides what backup type should be performed full differential or incremental merge the backups delete older versions according with the options you configured in order to efficiently use the destination free Space Full Backup Full backup is the starting point for all other backups and contains all the data in the folders and files that are selected to be backed up Because full backup stores all files and folders frequent full backups result in faster and simpler restore operations Remember that when you choose other backup types restore jobs may take longer Differential Backup A differential backup contains all files that have changed since the last full backup The advantage of a differential backup is that it shortens restore time compared to an incremental backup However if you perform the differential backup too many times the size of the differential backup might grow to be larger than the baseline full backup Incremental Backup An incremental backup stores all files that have changed since the last full differential or incremental backup The advantage of an incremental backup is that it takes the least time to complete However during a restore operation each incremental backu
275. pic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 199 7 8 Advanced Options on this page affect the way a particular backup job is executed Options that are marked with might not be available in your edition check Feature Matrix for detailed information on differences between editions Backup options Use local catalogs C Compress catalog in destination Test after backup Remove from catalog all files with errors _ Delete sources after successful backup C Ask for backup label before execution Backup open files Store temporary catalog data in memory Backup priority Normal priority Run action before backup _ Run program or action Clear backup gt G Run only once Abort backup when action fails Run action after backup _ Run program or action G Run only once v Success Warnings Errors Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 200 Backup4all 5 Comparison Criteria Custom v vi Size FAT NTFS CRC32 FAT NTFS vi Hidden FAT NTFS vi Date modified FAT NTFS IVi Read Only FAT NTFS vi System FAT NTFS v Date created FAT NTFS vV Archived FAT NTFS Compressed only NTFS lt gt Legacy use archive bit Play sounds after backup Play sounds T j ma Open sounds Backup options Use local catalogs bkc If this option is checked Backup4all will keep a local copy of t
276. pports AES encryption in three different strengths e 128 bit strong size of the encryption key is 128 bits This provides significantly better security than standard zip 2 0 encryption e 192 bit stronger size of the encryption key is 192 bits e 256 bit strongest size of the encryption key is 256 bits This is the strongest encryption method for zipped log file and it provides the best security Set password After you press this button a windows with the following fields will appear e New password Manually enter the password you want to use for your zipped log file in this field If you enter a password with less than 8 characters a warning window will be displayed when you click OK notifying that the password is not secure enough Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 208 Backup4all 5 Your password is less than 8 characters long This is not secure enough Do you want to continue Do not show this message again Ye Ne e Confirm new password Re enter the password in this field to avoid typing errors e Old password This field is enabled only when the log file encryption already has a password You can change the password only if you enter the old one in this field This way only the owner will be allowed to change the password Tips e when choosing a password it is recommended that you use a combination of letters and numbers and at least 8 characters e make sure that you
277. ption if the normal passive mode connection failed Use XCRC when testing if available Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 276 Backup4all 5 If the server supports the XCRC extension Backup4all can verify that files transferred to the server have been transmitted correctly using the CRC information received from the FTP server This results in faster testing as the files will not be downloaded to perform the CRC testing Resume upload downloads if available it resume the backup upload if the server supports resume command Limit file size to specify the maximum file size you want to have Larger files will be split Please note that many FTP servers does not allow you to upload files larger than 2 GB Timeout seconds You can set the time interval in seconds that is allowed for no data transfer before the transfer operation is interrupted and must be resumed Default is 15 seconds Firewall Proxy type Select one of the options below supported by your firewall if you use a proxy to connect to the FTP e None Sends the User name and optional Password for the FTP server as entered in the FTP window e Send command USER Sends the User name and optional Password defined in the proxy settings followed immediately by the User name and optional Password for the FTP server e Send command SITE Sends the User name and optional Password defined in the proxy settings the SITE command wit
278. r during a restore operation each incremental backup must be processed which could result in a lengthy restore job Make mirror A mirror backup is identical to a full backup with the exception that the files are not compressed in zip files and they cannot be protected with a password A mirror backup is most frequently used to create an exact copy of the backup data It has the benefit that the backup files can also be readily accessed using tools like Windows Explorer If you choose the Make mirror option you can also check the Zip the files option to zip each file individually preserving the folder structure This allows you to use the zip compression and Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland New Backup Wizard 147 6 5 encryption features Encrypt Use this option if you want to add zip protection to your backups Type the password you want to use for this backup The default encryption used is Advanced Encryption Standard AES the best choice in zip protection but recognized only by the latest version of third party zip applications The default size of the encryption key is 128 bits If you want to configure more encryption settings or choose a stronger encryption key press the Advanced mode button Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check featu
279. re matrix topic When do you want to backup On the last page of the New Backup Wizard you can choose When to run the backup When do you want to backup How often Weekly What day Sunday What hour 1 00 PM Help When do you want to backup Advanced mode Previous Cancel How often Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 148 Backup4all 5 From the drop down list you can select one of the available option e Manually the backup job will be started manually by the user e Daily the backup job will be started daily at its scheduled time e Weekly the backup job will be started weekly at its scheduled time e Monthly the backup job will be started monthly at its scheduled time e Shutdown the backup job will be started at the computer shutdown By default the selected option is Manually What day This field is activated only when the Weekly or Monthly option is selected in the How often list If the Weekly option is selected you can choose the day of the week when to run the backup If the Monthly option is selected you can choose the day number of the month when to run the backup What hour From this field you can select the hour for the backup job to start Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic
280. registration key again If you have questions or you experience problems related to the registration process you can use the Support Request button from Help menu under Support section to contact us We will be happy to assist you with the registration Backup4all is available as Shareware another way of saying Try before you buy It is fully functional for a period of 30 days After 30 days the program will start only if you enter a valid registration key OEM version users might be asked to enter their registration keys sooner You can buy Backup4all online if you fill out the online purchase form Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 306 Backup4all 5 12 3 12 4 Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Check for updates You have the latest version installed No update necessary News September 17 2012 Backup4all is fully compatible with Windows 8 July 13 2012 New build available Backup4all 4 8 278 June 22 2012 Backup4all 4 8 was released with important speed improvements Last check on July 04 2013 1 22 37 AM You can manually check for updates from File gt Help gt Check for Updates In the Updates window you can see if there are any updates available and what is new in the update Legal
281. rement unit Auto If checked the file sizes are shown like in Windows Explorer By default this option is checked Custom If checked you can see all file sizes in the same unit You can set the desired unit from the drop down list Possible choices are Bytes KB kilobytes MB megabytes or GB gigabytes Be advised that if you select GB as a unit for files under 10MB the size will be shown as OGB By default this option is not checked External program External program Difference viewer l Difference viewer Choose an application to compare the selected file version with the source file in Explore View You can also use parameters for difference viewer application Other Other v NTFS daylight saving correction 4 Show Task Scheduler error message Allow blank passwords when scheduling V Warn when insecure passwords are used V Show hidden files in open dialogs V Use New Backup Wizard to create backup jobs Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 257 Warn when insecure passwords are used If checked Backup4all will display a warning window when you enter passwords for zip encryption that contain less than 8 characters Show hidden files in open dialogs If checked files marked as hidden will be displayed in Open dialogs This is very useful if you want to add hidden files to your backup sources By default this option is checked Use New Backup Wizard to create back
282. rential and incremental types with cleanup actions in order to efficiently manage the stored backups according with the free disk space in destination or the maximum allowed space set by the user This backup type will automatically decide which is the best action to perform when a new backup will be executed By default 80 of the destination size is used by the smart backup If you want to use the full size of the destination drive for backup storage you can select the Use the entire available destination space option Make full Full backup is the starting point for all other backups and contains all the data in the folders and files that are selected to be backed up Because full backup stores all files and folders frequent full backups result in faster and simpler restore operations Remember that when you choose other backup types restore jobs may take longer Make differential A differential backup contains all files that have changed since the last full backup The advantage of a differential backup is that it shortens restore time compared to an incremental backup However if you perform the differential backup too many times the size of the differential backup might grow to be larger than the baseline full backup Make incremental An incremental backup stores all files that have changed since the last full differential or incremental backup The advantage of an incremental backup is that it takes the least time to complete Howeve
283. ression You can select the zip compression ratio from the Compression page in Backup Properties Backup4all also offers an option to encrypt your backup This gives you the option to Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 50 Backup4all 5 3 4 protect your important backed up data in case a backup got lost or stolen Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Differential Backup What is Differential Backup A differential backup contains all files that have changed since the last full backup The advantage of a differential backup is that it shortens restore time compared to a full backup or an incremental backup However if you perform the differential backup too many times the size of the differential backup might grow to be larger than the baseline full backup Description of the Differential Backup Type There is a significant but sometimes confusing distinction between differential and incremental backup Incremental backup stores all the new and modified files since the last full differential or incremental backup Differential backup offers a middle ground by backing up all the new and modified files since the last full backup That is where it gets its name it backs up everything that s different since the last full backup
284. riority 97 Hint 254 Hints 129 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Index 311 History 122 125 Iconsize 254 Implicit SSL 163 Import 64 127 Import inactive schedulers 127 Include 236 Incremental 46 184 Incremental backup 51 145 190 Independent zip files 60 Installation Install 9 License agreement 9 Setup language 9 Uninstall 9 Introduction 8 K Keyboard shortcuts 131 ee Labeling 58 199 LAN 133 136 152 159 Last backup size 86 Last backup status 86 Last CD DVD Blu ray 60 Legacy 199 Limit 58 Load 119 Loading CD DVD 59 Local catalog 58 199 Local destination 153 Local drives 133 135 152 Logging 44 122 Logging options Detailed log 267 Error logging 267 Restricted size 267 Summary log 267 Warning logging 267 Logs 125 Low priority 97 Lowest priority 97 Make 64 Make differential 64 Make full 64 Make incremental 64 Manage backup jobs Copy backup 26 Delete backup 26 Modify backup 26 Manage backup tags 74 Manage plugins 120 143 Mapped network drive 152 Merge 58 Minimize to tray 129 Mirror 46 184 Mirror backup 52 145 191 Mirror with zip 191 My Documents 150 My Pictures 150 N Name 150 New 64 New backup 22 New backup wizard Advanced 22 Destination 22 Explore 22 Filters 22 General 22 Scheduler 22 Sources 22 Statistics 22 Summary 22 Type 22 New features 14 New group 64 Next scheduled backup 86 No SSL 163 Normal priority
285. rive Use this page if the catalog is on a network drive Select the network location and enter the username password if necessarily Press Show to display the folders and selected file types bkc or ini Press Scan to display a list of only bkc ini files from all folders and subfolders in that location Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 93 Local hard drive Network a Open backup from shared network drive another computer or NAS FTP server Network SFTP server Network path UNC Azure storage Amazon S3 storage User name Password No password bke v Folders Files i Modified Open backup from an FTP server Use this page if the catalog is on an FTP server Configure the FTP server or choose an existing configuration Press Show to display the folders and selected file types bkc or ini Press Scan to display a list of only bkc ini files from all folders and subfolders in that location Here you can see how to configure the FTP server Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 94 Backup4all 5 Local hard drive FTP Network Open backup from FTP server SFTP server FTP server Configuration Configure FTP lt FTP server not configured gt Azure storage Amazon S3 storage Folder
286. rom the FTP server This results in faster testing as the files will not be downloaded to perform the CRC testing Resume upload downloads if available it resume the backup upload if the server supports resume command Limit file size to specify the maximum file size you want to have Larger files will be split Please note that many FTP servers does not allow you to upload files larger than 2 GB Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 166 Backup4all 5 7 3 7 Timeout you can set the time interval in seconds that is allowed for no data transfer before the transfer operation is interrupted and must be resumed Default is 15 seconds Firewall Proxy type select one of the options below supported by your firewall if you use a proxy to connect to the FTP e None Sends the User name and optional Password for the FTP server as entered in the FTP window e Send command USER Sends the User name and optional Password defined in the proxy settings followed immediately by the User name and optional Password for the FTP server e Send command SITE Sends the User name and optional Password defined in the proxy settings the SITE command with the Host value and the User name and optional Password for the FTP site e Send command OPEN Sends the User name and optional Password defined in the proxy settings sends the OPEN command with the Host value and the User name and optional Password for t
287. roperties of a file will be used when deciding if a file was modified or not There is a list of quick sets to choose for predefined comparison criteria e None if this is selected a warning window is shown asking you to confirm if you want the Date modified criteria disabled or not If this criterion is disabled Backup4all will only backup files that have the size changed Date modified property of a file is an important criteria to decide if a file changed If you disable this comparison criteria some file changes may not be detected Do you want to disable Date modified criteria e Custom this is the default option and has several important file properties and attributes selected as comparison criteria Size Date modified Date created Archived Hidden System Read Only e Archive attribute only if this is selected a warning window is shown asking you to confirm if you want the Date modified criteria disabled or not If this criteria is disabled Backup4all will only backup files that have the archive attribute changed e FAT attributes if this is selected a set of File Allocation Table attributes will be used for comparison e NTFS attributes if this is selected a set of NTFS New Technology File System attributes will be used for comparison Note that these attributes are available only on Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista and Windows 7 Available file properties are e Size file
288. rrors means that there are no corrupted missing files in the backup y Test finished New Backup OK in 01 39 min i Testing New Backup found no errors Selecting OK in 01 39 min Click to stop C Don t show this message type anymore _ Don t popup the notification window for this message type Go to job Change notification settings Apply default for all and dose e Testing lt backup name gt found error s Do you want to see the log file means that some files are corrupted or missing from the backup you should press Yes to see the test log file also available from the Jobs tab History section View Log gt Last Test Log Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 100 Backup4all 5 Test finished with warnings New Backup No in 48 s i Testing New Backup found 1 error s See log file C Users Admin AppData Roaming Softland Backup4all 5 Logs New Backup_20130702150351 test log for details Do you want to view the log file now Yes No Selecting No in 48 s Click to stop C Don t show this message type anymore C Don t popup the notification window for this message type Go to job Change notification settings Apply default for all and dose Backup4all has also the option to test the files automatically after backup This option is checked by default and it is recommended to leave it this way However if you want to modify it you
289. s Disadvantages e You cannot select how many backup file versions to be saved e Backup4all will use all the given space in destination Smart Backup Type in Backup4all Backup4all supports the smart backup type and offers a solution for the storage space requirement issue The output of a smart backup is a container file which is created with zip compression You can select the zip compression ratio from the Compression page in Backup Properties Backup4all also offers an option to encrypt your backup This gives you the option to protect your important backed up data in case a backup got lost or stolen The following options can be used to limit the maximum space in destination occupied by the backup e Limit backup size to of destination size default is 80 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Types 49 3 3 e Limit backup size to KB MB GB default is 50 GB Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Full Backup What is Full Backup Full backup is the starting point for all other backups and contains all the data in the folders and files that are selected to be backed up Because the full backup stores all files and folders frequent full backups result in faster and simpler restore operations Remember that whe
290. s please check feature matrix topic System Requirements To install Backup4all you need Windows XP Server 2003 Vista Windows 7 Windows 2008 or Windows 8 and at least 100 MB of free disk space Because the application uses zip compression additional disk space is needed for the temporary directory The amount of free space depends on the size of files to backup Note Backup4all can backup open files only if installed on Windows XP Windows 2003 Server Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 2008 or Windows 8 and if the files are stored on NTFS partitions Installation Install To install Backup4all on a computer you need to have administrative rights The installation process does not take much time All you need to do is to follow the instructions of the Backup4all Setup Wizard A reboot will be required after installing of SPTD driver If you have already installed an older version of Backup4all you can install the new version on top of the older one no need to uninstall it the installer will recognize if the program is running and will ask if you wish to close it in order to continue You might need to close Backup4all manually if it is in a middle of an operation Note If you have version 4 x or previous installed you can install version 5 x without uninstalling the other one Backup4all 5 will be installed and run separately and will give you the option to import your backup jobs tags from the previous versions When you start t
291. s there is be a message indicating how many jobs are active e Suspend sustem will suspend all the application activity e Cancel all running will stop all running actions e Stop all running will cancel all running actions e Show messages will display the Notifications window QO One job is active gt Suspend system gt Cancel all running gt Stop all running Show messages If the system is suspend a message will appear on the Backup4all interface Backup system is paused No actions will be executed while the system is paused Backup system is paused No actions will run until you resume Press here to resume Sort by Execution or Descending 7 ae New Backup Dic Smart HDD C Users Info Documents Users B Info Tray Icon Hint When backups are executed restored or tested the tray icon is animated and the name of the backup jobs are shown in the hint along with the current operation Backup4all One job is active Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 131 5 20 Keyboard Shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts configured in Backup4all New backup wizard CTRL N A Open backup CTRL O Backup job properties CTRL P e Explore F2
292. s and your email address as password It is not recommended to backup important files to public FTP servers In the When destination server is not ready section you can enter the number of attempts and time between those attempts to connect to the FTP server By default if the FTP server is not reachable Backup4all will try 3 times at a 5 seconds delay before aborting the backup You can increase or decrease these values using the Retry and wait fields Additional settings like bandwidth SSL connection and firewall can also be configured from this page Once you have finished defining the connection press the Test button to check if the FTP details you have entered are correct If the test was successful The FTP connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Setting the destination to FTP When defining a new backup job using the New Backup Wizard select the FTP option in the d estination section 1st page of the wizard If you already have a backup job defined and want to change the destination to FTP select that backup job open the Properties window Ctrl P go to the Destination page and select FTP server After that go to FTP server page and specify an existing FTP configuration or create a new one From the Use existing configuration select an already defined FTP configuration given that you added one in the File gt Options gt FTP window The description of the selected FTP configuration will be listed bellow
293. s available Use this option to avoid removing your files from backup if the sources are not available all the time If you don t use this option when the source files are not reachable Backup4all will consider them as being deleted or excluded The deleted or excluded files will be removed from the backup Others Zip the files Use this option to zip each file individually The folder structure will be preserved only the files will be zipped Copy NTFS security permissions Use this option to copy the files NTFS security permissions Copy NTFS alternate file streams Use this option to copy the NTFS alternate file streams Allow file splitting when spanning The option is effective only when there is not enough space in the destination to copy all files Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 194 Backup4all 5 removable media is full USB drive is full etc If checked the application will copy files to the destination until a file will not fit Then it will split that file and continue with the rest of it on the next disk If the option is not set files are not split If you are backing up media files music videos you should uncheck this option so that you will not have any melody movie split By default this option is checked Sort mirror files for optimized spanning This option is useful when spanning the backup over multiple removable drives If this is checked Backup4all will sort the files b
294. s euduccevveutbertecaectactads 140 MaAZO E a EY OO SE SE eaf 142 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Contents 5 3 What do you want to DaCKUP cccsecccesceesseeeeneeeeeeesenseeeeneneessaaesaneeeeeaesescaesaseeeeeeeesaseaeeneeeaeeeas 143 4 How do you want to DaCKUp scccccccsesceesseeeeneeeeneeseeseeeeneeeessaaeseaeeeeesaeseseaeseseaeeseneseseaeenseeeeseas 145 5 When do you want to DaCKUp ccseccesccesseeeeeeeeeeeeesenseeeeeeeeeesaaesaaeeeenaeseseaesaaneeeseesaseaeenseneeteas 147 Part VII Backup Properties 150 hs OVO AAT ected ts E E E E R E AS E teewetesncuube bode autusssdatabuannucs cnisueusbduscautebecboasas 150 eee a AE E E E E E EEEE EE A E EEA 150 BLSE o 9 E E E EEN E E ee E 152 Local hard TIVO a aaaea a apaa e a aaaea aao a Eaa Eaa Eaa A e iane adotada 153 External hard drive 154 CD DVD or Blu ray 155 FREIMOV AD IO TEE E AT AET TTT TTT A EATE AAT 157 Network 159 FTP server 161 Edit configuratioM arrin aaa A a reat dara retea AEN Eea Aeta E AEA TAEAE 163 SET eT AT T aca ET EAE EE EE ETETE A A E E ETNE TEE AE E S 166 Edit configuration 168 aA a o E 2 E E EEEE A EEA TAT A T E EE EAEE E E T TAT TT 171 Edit COMPGURALON iis ie ssdi cee eresestvenebacendccassdeteecces cantecta seaeba cdi cdaceusds Hee et cavdevevebyescnvacecdssousetuesatceedabin ota AAA NEEE 173 Amazon S3 175 Edit configuration srai eien ses cusses gattes sensed de deudeede SEE are a ETNE ATE
295. s exclude filter boxes Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 11 7 Logs and history On the Logs and history page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item you can change log and history options General Preferences gz oS Configure log and history options Startup Application folders Log detailed information Backup v Include summary in log Filters Caney jefe Backup on demand Unlimited size CD DVD or Blu ray Restricted to FTP Log viewer Program lt Default text editor gt Log file extension log Azure Amazon S3 Email History Updates vV Delete records older than 3 gt Months v Notifications Delete corresponding log files too Passwords Cancel Content Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 268 Backup4all 5 Log detailed information If checked the program will log detailed information about all files handled by the backup restore or test process By default this option is not checked Include summary in log If checked the logs will contain all the text available in the main window s Summary view By default this option is not checked Log folder In this section you can set the size limits for the fo
296. s in the designated location using the original directory structure If you select this option and you have files from multiple drives some files might get overwritten For example if you backed up your Users folder from your C drive when you restore it to a different location having the Do not create drive letter folder unchecked Backup4all will first create a folder named C and in it place the Users folder If you would have checked the Do not create drive letter folder option the folder named C wouldn t have been created How do you want to restore Restore the latest version of all files Backup4all will restore the latest version for all the files in the backup Restore all files as of Choose the date to which you want to restore the files The restored files will be exactly as they were on the selected date Note If you used the Limit number of file versions option restoring the files as of a specified date could not restore all your files if some of them were deleted by the file version limitation Choose files and restore the latest version Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 228 Backup4all 5 8 2 Backup4all will restore the latest version for all the files in the backup You will be able to filter the files using the Preview page Choose filter files and restore the latest version Backup4all will restore the latest version of the files Files that are excluded from backup are not rest
297. selected only if the backup destination is a CD DVD or Blu ray drive e Test you can schedule a test operation instead of a backup When Test is selected the Backup Numbers box is displayed 12 544 You can type in there the backup numbers you want to test The order you type them in is the order they will be tested in Use the character to test all backup numbers or the character to test only the last backup e Repair you can schedule a repair action to be executed The missing or corrupted files from destination will be backed up again e Repair catalog only if this option is checked only the backup catalog will be repaired the missing or corrupted files in destination will be removed from the backup catalog so they will be backed up again next time e Cleanup at the scheduled date it deletes the selected backup numbers When Cleanup is selected other options become available to filter the backup numbers that will be deleted e Newer than if checked backup numbers that are newer than the selected date will be deleted when the scheduled Cleanup operation runs e Older than if checked backup numbers that are older than the selected date will be deleted when the scheduled Cleanup operation runs e Older than fixed date backup numbers that are Older than a certain fixed date will be deleted when the scheduled Cleanup operation runs e Do not delete Full backups if this is checked the full backups will be kept even if
298. sfers like WWW browsers option 3 Press OK After that use the Test FTP connection button to see if the FTP connection works Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Getting Started 35 2 8 2 2 8 3 Connecting Through Proxy If you are connecting to the Internet through a proxy server you will have to enter the connection details in the FTP Configuration window in order to be able to backup to FTP Setting Backup4all to backup to FTP using proxy 1 Go to Backup Properties gt FTP server gt Edit configuration or File gt Options gt FTP gt Edit 2 Select a Proxy Type from the available options e None Sends the User name and optional Password for the FTP server as entered in the FTP window e Send command USER Sends the User name and optional Password defined in the proxy settings followed immediately by the User name and optional Password for the FTP server e Send command SITE Sends the User name and optional Password defined in the proxy settings the SITE command with the Host value and the User name and optional Password for the FTP site e Send command OPEN Sends the User name and optional Password defined in the proxy settings sends the OPEN command with the Host value a
299. size it is mandatory e Date modified the latest date and time when the file was modified a warning message is displayed if you uncheck it e Date created the date and time when the file was created e CRC32 the most comprehensive criteria because it calculates a checksum based on file contents and compares it with the checksum from the backup this slows the process Available file attributes are e Read Only file can be read but not modified or deleted e Archived unavailable when the Clear archive bit option is checked from the Backup Properties gt Type window file attribute used for backup When a file is created the archive Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 204 Backup4all 5 bit is turned on When a backup program copies the file it turns off the archive attribute Hidden files marked Hidden do not normally display unless the file manager option to display them is selected System files marked System do not normally display unless the file manager option to display them is selected Compressed only NTFS file that is made generally much smaller than the original size of file Decompression occurs automatically when the file is read The file is compressed again when it is closed or saved Temporary only NTFS the file is being used for temporary storage Encrypted only NTFS file is encrypted on a NTFS volume to protect it from unauthorized access Not indexed only NTFS
300. sociated with the IE Favorites bkc located in the E Backup Destination folder use bBackup f E Backup Destination IE Favorites bkc Priority 2 To force an incremental backup on the My Documents backup job use bBackup i My Documents Priority 2 To execute all backup jobs from the Samples tag use bBackup g Samples Priority 2 Backup4all returns exit codes after each task execution backup independent test or cleanup As a general case if the backup was successful the exit code is 0 otherwise is different Here are the possible exit codes e 0 action was successful action has not started parameter errors syntax errors other errors action finished with errors action was finished with warnings independent test was finished with errors independent test was finished with warnings UU AUNE Backup job definitions ini files are saved separately for each Windows user These files can be found in the AppData Softland Backup4all 5 IniFiles folder of your user profile if it s not changed in the File gt Options gt File locations window Backup catalogs bkc files are saved locally and in the backup destination together with the backup files When a backup job is executed for the first time a bkc file is created There is only one bkc file for each backup job The command line application uses the same engine same configuration files and the same log files as the main application It always performs
301. st left there as they were burned before but the catalog bkc file is updated and the restore operation will not copy these files back e When backing up to CD DVD or Blu ray discs Backup4all requires additional free space on the Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup to CD DVD or Blu ray 59 4 2 drive where the Temporary Folder is located at least 7OOMb when backing up to CDs or 4 7Gb when backing up to DVDs Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Use Built in Driver Backup4all does not need third party drivers or other CD DVD or Blu ray burning software to be installed like ActiveX ASPI etc to be able to burn a CD DVD or Blu ray Backup4all has a built in CD DVD or Blu ray burner to backup to CD DVD or Blu ray disc directly Set Up Internal CD DVD or Blu ray Burner There are three simple steps to set up the internal CD DVD or Blu ray burner 1 Open the Backup Properties window and go to the Destination page 2 Select the drive letter for the CD DVD or Blu ray burner device you want to use If the CD DVD or Blu ray device is compatible with the built in burner you will see the following message Device name Using internal burner 3 In the same page you can e configure the burn speed e set the Erase d
302. t This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 308 Backup4all 5 Index m bkc 58 60 dini 127 A Abort backup 211 Advanced mode 150 Amazon 142 Access Key ID 39 Bucket 39 Folder 39 Secret Access Key 39 Amazon S3 175 Application log 122 Archive bit 199 ASPI 59 Attributes 81 Automatically span 60 Azure 140 171 Account name 38 Container 38 Folder 38 Key 38 Shared Access Signature 38
303. t it will be created Note If you configured a new Azure location or you edit an existing one you should use the Test button to see if the Azure settings are correct If the test was successful The Azure connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 284 Backup4all 5 11 13 Amazon S3 The Amazon S3 page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item contains Amazon settings General F ete s Manage FTP servers Preferences Startup Application folders When FTP server not ready Backup Retry times Filters Wait seconds Logs and history ae Backup on demand Name CD DVD or Blu ray novaPDF FTP TP SFTP Azure Amazon S3 Email Updates Notifications Passwords ajx E cpp grp html ink am r CSS th htpasswd java asa J CSV hpp htt js asc c ctl hgx htx jsp asp P dhtml hta in dog aspx J diz htaccess d logfile awk F file htc d m3u bat forward htm sini m4 lt Type to filter Dele y Cancel When Amazon S3 server not ready The first number Retry option indicates how many times the application tries to access the destination server i
304. t Backup4all uses its own built in burning engine to backup to CD DVD or Blu ray media you do not need third party drivers or burning software to be installed If you prefer packet writing using third party software you can select it in the Write method section If the backup does not fit onto one CD DVD or Blu ray disc Backup4all will automatically span the backup over multiple media Each disc is assigned a different label for future identification We recommend marking the CD DVD or Blu ray disc with this label A few recommendations before backing up to CD DVD and Blu ray discs e Before backup execution be sure to insert the CD DVD or Blu ray disc containing the latest bkc file if you have the option Use local catalogs unchecked in Backup Properties gt Advanced gt Backup options section default is checked e On backups to hard disk you can limit the number of stored zip backups by using the Yes imit number of file versions Yes limit number of backups and Merge backups options These options do not apply to CD DVD or Blu ray media you cannot limit the number of stored backups on removable media A mirror backup copies every file matching the sources and the file filter to CD DVD or Blu ray disc On a mirror backup to hard disk files that are deleted and excluded from sources can be deleted from destination too if you want so This is not possible on the CD DVD or Blu ray disc so deleted and excluded files are ju
305. t next start Backup Press this button to create or run backup jobs Backup Run selected backup job Select an existing backup job from the list and press Backup to run the selected job If you want to assign the selected backup job to your One touch device check the Use job for One Touch Backup option Create Create new Backup job Press the New button to start creating a new backup job using the New Backup Wizard If you want to assign the selected backup job to your One touch device check the Use job for One Touch Backup option Restore Restore Restore from selected backup Select an existing backup job from the list and press Restore to open the Restore Wizard Open Load backup jobs Use the Open button to recreate a backup job from the backup catalog bkc or from the Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 73 5 3 initialization file ini The recreated backup job will be added to the backup list If you don t want to show the Backup4all Startup window next time you open Backup4all uncheck the Show this dialog at next start option By default this option is checked Links Shows a list of the most popular articles from our knowledge base Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup List
306. t will test only the last backup job can be used in the same time with other numbers too For the priority level you can select a value between 1 4 as 1 is the lowest priority and 4 is the highest priority Tags Syntax bTagTest G tag_name Priority 1 2 3 4 You can also have as parameter an existing tag This tag must be defined in Backup4all otherwise the backup will not run Switch to apply to this parameter case insensitive preceded by or e G execute the jobs containing that tag with their defined types the switch is mandatory if you want to execute a backup tag For the priority level you can select a value between 1 4 as 1 is the lowest priority and 4 is the highest priority Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 246 Backup4all 5 10 3 Examples To execute a test for all backup numbers of the My Pictures backup job bTest t My Pictures tn Priority 2 To execute a test for first two and last backup number of the My Pictures backup job bTest t My Pictures tn 1 2 Priority 2 Backup4all returns exit codes after each task execution backup independent test repair restore or cleanup As a general case if the action was successful the exit code is 0 otherwise is different Here are the possible exit codes e 0 action was successful e 1 action has not started parameter errors syntax errors other errors e 2 action finished with errors e
307. tal or differential Last full backup duration not displayed for mirror backup type Shows the duration of the last full backup execution Last full backup size not displayed for mirror backup type Shows the size of the last full backup compressed size of all files present in backup uncompressed compression percentage For example 10 MB 30 MB 33 means that the size of the last full backup was 10 MB the uncompressed size of the files backed up was 30 MB and the compression ratio was 33 Total size of backup not displayed for mirror backup type Total size of the backup takes into consideration all backup increments bkc file and any folders that might have been created It shows the total size after compression without compression compression percentage For mirror backup the compressed values are not shown because there is no compression Number of backups Number of times the backup job was executed Last backup status Displays the following information e Last backup was successful when everything went OK e Last backup failed when the backup was aborted due to an error e Last backup had lt X gt warnings when the backup was done but lt X gt files could not be backed up e Last backup was canceled when the user canceled the backup execution Files folders in backup Shows the number of files in the backup The number between the brackets is for the files added at the last backup For full backup the number of files
308. tatus tit pressed files that were added to the backup as new are shown in the tree All files with this status will have picture in front of them Bf pressed files that were added to the backup as modified are shown in the tree All files with this status will have picture in front of them If pressed files that had been in backup and were excluded by new changes in file filter are shown in the tree All files with this status will have picture in front of them tif pressed all directories in the tree will be expanded For a large number of files and directories this operation can take a longer time Press the ESC key to stop the process z f pressed all directories in the tree will be collapsed X if pressed the Filter window will be shown Use this option to filter the files displayed in the tree Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 86 Backup4all 5 Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 5 8 Statistics View You can activate Statistics view by e pressing the Statistics button from the Jobs tab e pressing the F3 keyboard shortcut backup 2 Outlook Last backup Last backup duration Last backup size comp uncomp Last full backup on Last full backup duration Last full backup size comp u
309. ter When this option is set Backup4all uses the information stored in bkc files to copy only new or modified files to the destination If this option is not set the system will copy all files each time the backup is executed By default this option is checked Create full paths including drive letter Sometimes there can be sources with the same names The system will detect this conflict situation and will show a warning message To avoid files to be overwritten check the Save full folder info option This will create the full path of the source in the destination For example suppose we have the backup source C My Documents My Pictures Without this option only the My Pictures folder will be created and its subfolders With this option set the destination will contain the C folder My Documents inside C folder My Pictures inside My Documents folder and so on By default this option is unchecked Copy files in a subfolder If checked the files will be copied in a subfolder of the destination folder typically you will see a bkc file and a folder with the same name If the option is not set the files and folder structure will be copied directly into the destination folder By default this option is checked Remove excluded or deleted files from backup Use this option to remove from the backup the files that were deleted or excluded from the backup sources This option is not selected by default Only if the source drive i
310. the AppData Softland Backup4all 5 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 260 Backup4all 5 11 5 BkcFiles folder of your Window login account profile Override log folder This is the folder where the log files are saved You can use the Browse button to select an existing folder You can change the folder but the existing log files will not be copied to the new location you can do this manually if you wish You can use the Browse button to select an existing folder By default this option is set to the AppData Softland Backup4all 5 Logs folder of your Window login account profile Override plugins folder This is the folder where the plugin files are saved You can use the Browse button to select an existing folder By default this option is set to the AppData Softland Backup4all 5 Plugins folder of your Window login account profile Override SFTP host key folder This is the folder where the SFTP host keys are kept You can use the Browse button to select an existing folder By default this option is set to the AppData Softland Backup4all 5 folder of your Window login account profile Override default destination folder This is the folder used as destination for the newly created backup jobs The existing backup job destinations will not be affected if you change this option you have to manually change the destination for them You can use the Browse button to select an ex
311. the current backup job If this action is set then the backup performed is a full backup even if the backup type is set to incremental or differential You can customize it with the following parameters numbers can be changed as necessary e lt Clear backup d 7 gt Clear backup is executed only if 7 days have passed since the first backup increment the full backup lt Clear backup n 10 gt Clear backup is executed only if the number of file versions is 10 lt Clear backup d 7 n 10 gt Clear backup is executed if 7 days have passed since the first backup increment the full backup or if the number of file versions is 10 lt Clear backup dw 1 2 7 gt Clear backup is executed only in the first second and seventh day of the week Monday Tuesday and Sunday in the given example Valid values 1 7 if a parameter outside of these values is set it will be ignored lt Clear backup dm 23 30 gt Clear backup is executed only in the 23rd and 30th day of the month Valid values 1 31 if a parameter outside of these values is set it will be ignored same as using the value 31 for a month having only 30 days Run only once If this option is set the action will run only once at the next backup execution and the Run program action option will be reset and disabled afterwards Abort backup when action fails User can check this option to abort the backup if the action ran before the backup failed Backup4all uses the exit codes return
312. the New Backup Wizard on backup type page The button is available only for Smart backup full incremental differential and mirror with zip backup types not available for mirror without zip By default the No encryption option is selected If you want to protect your backup you can choose the type of the encryption to be used The Zip 2 compatible encryption offers moderate security but is compatible with all third party zip applications The best choice is the AES encryption which is the new standard in ZIP protection but is recognized only by the latest version of third party zip applications like Winzip or PKWare Backup4all supports AES encryption in 3 different key strengths 128 bit 192 bit and 256 bit These numbers reflect the size of the encryption keys used to protect the data the higher the number the stronger the encryption All three types provide higher security than the password protection method When choosing a password it is recommended that you use a combination of letters and numbers and at least a 6 character long password You should manually enter the password in the New password field and re enter it in the Confirm new password field to avoid typing errors The Old password field is enabled only when the backup job already has a password You can change the password only if you enter the old one in this field This way only the owner of the backup will be allowed to change the password The system makes it p
313. the activation manually you will need access to a computer that has Internet access License file received by email after purchase C ProgramData Softland Backup4all 5 License lic John Comments optional wsis8 After you enter the details above click on Next to continue with the activation What is activation Nex 4 On the second step of the manual activation you have two options e Email activation request Using this option the default email client will open to send the activation request After sending the activation request email in a short moment you will get an email containing the activation file Please load that file on the next page in order to activate the application e Save activation request Using this option you will be asked to indicate the location where the activation request file will be saved Take that file and go to Computer B where you have internet access Load the file on activate backup4all com and press Activate You will then have the option to download the activation response file Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Help 303 Activate ap ition OOOO I UO Manual Activation Step 2 of 3 select the manual activation method 1 If you have email access from this computer click the button below to send the activation request file Email activation request 2 If you don t have email access click on the button below to save
314. the associated Windows application e choose View with Notepad if you want to open view that version of the file with Notepad e choose Compare with source if you want to compare the selected version with the existing source e choose Compare versions if you want to compare the selected versions e choose Select columns to enable disable the columns displayed Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 84 Backup4all 5 5 7 Backup View You can activate Backup view by e pressing the Backup button from the Jobs tab e pressing CTRL F2 keyboard shortcut Jobs Tags Layout Backup View 3j View with Notepad Restore Test View Restore EEA Collapse All F Filter Files Backup Log z Sule bah teed Backups Files amp Folders Layout Filter Jobs lt Sort by Executio Descending TE akl bas All Jot O backup 2 m 7 1 2013 2 37 41 PM 6 Failed Jobs Smart HDD C Users Admin Docu a TAPIS TARTS POA 3 Running Jobs 7 1 2013 1 42 45 PM 4 New Backup O tag2 Smart HDD C Users Admin Docu pn Se a 7 1 2013 1 31 12 PM 1 lt kO Outlook T O Smart HDD C Users Admin Docu File Folder Size Modified lt Favorites gt J Links pe E 5 36 3
315. the destination folder or the Clear backup action was executed before backup see the Advanced page of the Backup Properties window Mirror Backup Type The mirror backup implementation provides some useful options to improve the backup quality Since the mirror backup keeps only one version of each file you can use the Create subfolder s in destination with following name option to copy the files to customized subfolders therefore keeping more versions of the files Backup4all can only use the latest version for the Restore or Test operations You can restore older versions manually If the Copy files in a subfolder option is checked the files will be copied in a subfolder of the destination folder typically you will see a bkc file and a folder with the same name If the option is not set the files and folder structure will be copied directly into the destination folder When the Fast Mirror copy only new or modified files option is used Backup4all uses the information stored in bkc files to copy only new or modified files to the destination If this option is not set the system will copy all files each time the backup is executed Using the mirror backup type you can also choose to Zip the files This option will zip each file individually preserving the folder structure In this case you can use the zip compression and Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 56 Backup4all 5 encryption
316. they fall into the range of files filtered for deletion e Do not delete Differential backups if this is checked the differential backups will be kept even if they fall into the range of files filtered for deletion Note that this option is available only when Do not delete full backups is checked because differential backups depend on full backups e Clear the destination folder Deletes files and folders that should not be in the destination folder Only the files mentioned in backup catalog are kept e Restore select this option if you want to schedule a restore action e Original location use this option to restore files in the original location e Other location use this option to restore files in another location Do not create drive letter folder if this option is checked when restoring to another location the drive letter folder won t be created e Restore the latest version of all files use this option to restore the latest version of all files e Restore all files as of use this option to restore the files as they were on a specified date e Restore backup numbers use this option to restore one or more backup numbers Restore excluded and deleted files if this option is checked excluded and deleted files will be also restored Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 5 14 119 Pro
317. this button to set the Windows login password for the above specified user account At system shutdown If this is selected the task will be executed when the shutdown command is started Backup4all intercepts the shutdown message and there is no way to know if a restart or a shutdown was requested This is why it will always shutdown your computer after the task is executed Priority Indicates the task priority Move the cursor to right or left in order to increase or decrease the priority Notifications Force all notifications to timeout use this option to force all notifications to timeout This option is useful to continue the overnight backups when there is a message waiting for user input That message will be closed and the backup will continue Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic When On this page you can set when do you want to execute the scheduled task Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 215 General it Co When do you want to execute it What When to run Specify the conditions that will trigger the task Enabled Trigger Description Add Edit Delete C Run task as soon as possible after a scheduled start is missed C Wake the computer to run this task L Start the task on
318. tion If the server forces use of zlib compression it will happen automatically Hot keys Host keys folder Clear cache press this button if you want to delete the host keys stored in the keys folder Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Azure The Azure page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item contains Azure settings Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 282 Backup4all 5 General Manage Azure configurations Preferences Startup When Azure server not ready Application folders Backup Retry times Filters Wait seconds Logs and history aaa Backup on demand Name CD DVD or Blu ray My Azure account FTP SFTP Amazon S3 Email Updates Notifications Passwords When Azure server not ready The first number Retry option indicates how many times the application tries to access the destination server if it is not available By default this option is set to 3 attempts The second number wait option indicates how many seconds to wait between two consecutive attempts to access the destination location By default this option is set to 5 seconds This option is useful when the destination Azure server has restrictions i e only 2 users logged in the same time no of ac
319. tion from outside the program on your desktop quick launch or other location Destination Folder opens the backup destination folder Scheduler opens the scheduler page showing all scheduled tasks for the selected job Refresh reloads the selected backup job e Refresh all jobs reloads all backup jobs Execute this group includes the buttons for all actions that can be executed on a backup job 22 ceili Backup Restore Execute e Backup e Backup performs the backup type defined in Backup Properties e Full performs a full backup regardless of the backup type defined in Backup Properties e Differential performs an incremental backup regardless of the backup type defined in Backup Properties e Incremental performs a differential backup regardless of the backup type defined in Backup Properties e Restore e Restore starts the Restore wizard e Latest version restores the latest version to its original location without showing the Restore wizard e Latest version to restores the latest version to a specified location without showing the Restore wizard e Repair e Repair starts the backup repair e Repair catalog only starts the repair of the backup catalog e Test opens the Test backup window e Clean opens the Clean backup window Views Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 67 amp th Explore Backup Statistics Views e Explore switches to Explore V
320. tions to reduce the backup size When you limit the number of backups you can also use the Merge backups option to perform an internal merge operation between backups to maintain the maximum limit These options can be used only for Full Differential and Incremental backup type Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Smart Backup What is Smart Backup Smart backup is a backup type that combines the full differential and incremental backup types with cleanup operations in order to efficiently manage the backups according with the backup settings and the free disk space in destination The Smart backup type starts with a full backup The advantage is that you don t need to worry about the number of backups to store in order to fit on the destination drive which backup version to clean or merge as Backup4all will take care of that Description of the Smart Backup Type Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 48 Backup4all 5 It would be ideal to make full backups all the time because they are the most comprehensive and are self contained However the amount of time it takes to run full backups often prevents us from using this backup type Full backups are often restricted to a weekly or monthly schedule although the increasing speed and
321. tland 238 Backup4all 5 File name Enabling this will allow defining filters based on file name pattern Press Add and select an existing file extension from the Filter combo doc pdf zip etc If the extension does not exist in the combo just type it in and press OK You can use the Edit or Delete buttons to modify remove the file name filters defined File name patterns can include e it matches one or more letters For example a doc matches all files that start with a and have doc extension e it matches only one letter For example a do matches all files that start with a and have any extension composed of three letters the first two being do Folder name Enabling this will allow defining filters based on folder name pattern Enter the directory name that you want to filter in the following format directory_name leading and ending are required Backup4all will apply the filter to all the directories that are called directory_name If you want to apply the filter to directories containing a specific word you must enter it in the following format keyword Now Backup4all will apply the filter to all the directories that have the word keyword in their names You can use the Edit or Delete buttons to modify remove the folder name filters defined You can also use environment variables when creating filters temp SystemRoot etc File attributes Enable Custom R
322. to determine whether a file has changed since the most recent backup The advantage of reduced backup duration comes with a price increased restore duration When restoring from incremental backup you need the most recent full backup as well as every incremental backup you ve made since the last full backup For example if you did a full backup on Friday and incremental on Monday Tuesday and Wednesday and the PC crashes Thursday morning you would need all four backup container files Friday s full backup plus the incremental backup for Monday Tuesday and Wednesday By comparison if you had done differential backup on Monday Tuesday and Wednesday then to Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 52 Backup4all 5 3 6 restore on Thursday morning you d have needed Friday s full backup plus Wednesday s differential backup Advantages e Backing up is the fastest e It uses the least storage space Disadvantages e Restore is the slowest Incremental Backup Type in Backup4all Backup4all supports incremental backup type and offers a solution for the slow restore issue To keep the number of stored backups to a reasonable number and reduce the size of the backups Backup4all provides three options Yes limit number of file versions Yes limit number of backups and Merge backups These options will perform an internal merge to keep the number of stored backups under the selected limit The following opti
323. torage Selecting a backup destination type on the Destination page will enable the options on the corresponding type page Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 153 7 3 1 You can also change the backup destination from any destination type page by checking the Change destination to option If you lost your backup job from the backup list and you want to recreate it you can do so by using the File gt Open backup option and selecting an existing bkc or ini file The same action takes place if you double click on the bkc file If the backup destination is on a remote location you can use File gt Open backup from window to easily locate and retrieve the backup catalog ini file A new backup job configuration will be added to the backup list and the configuration of the new backup job is copied from the bkc file Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Local hard drive You can use a valid local hard disk destination for your backup The Local hard drive option is selected by default when you define a new backup General Desdikation cy Save backup to a local hard drive External hard drive peter eee vi Change destination to local hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Removable Destination
324. tory section For each operation the system logs e start time and date e the operation e errors or warnings e end time and date The File gt Options gt Logs and history configuration window provides additional options that you can select to further customize the logging process Content Log detailed information If this option is enabled the logs will contain information about every file used in the backup restore or test process Include summary in log If this option is checked the logs will include all the text available in the Summary view Log folder After a long period the application will generate a large number of log files Since all the log files are stored in the same folder the system has an option to limit the size of the log folder Just select Restricted to and choose a Size and Unit for the log folder default is 10MB If the log file of the Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 123 running backup job is larger than the limit it will still be stored in the log folder When the same operation will run again the previous log file will be deleted If you want to keep all log files no matter the size select the Unlimited size option Backup Logging File Edit Format View Help 7 2 2013 3 29 09 PM Backup4all 5 0 151 7 2 2013 3 29 09 PM Operating system Windows 8 7 2 2013 3 29 10 PM Starting backup for New Bac 7 2 2013 3 29 10 PM Name Internet E
325. tory window if you right click on the header and check another columns The available columns are e Name shows the name of the backup job tag It cannot be unchecked e Type shows the type of the backup job or tag e Default Backup Type shows the default backup type for each backup job e Action Type shows what action was performed backup restore test or cleanup e Action Backup Type shows what type of backup was performed full differential incremental or mirror e Forced shows if the backup type was forced or it was the default one e Application shows if the main application or command line was used to run that backup e Start Date shows the backup start date e End Date shows the backup end date e Duration shows the backup duration e Status shows the backup status success warning or error e Files shows the number of files backed up e Folders shows the number of folders backed up Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 127 5 18 e Size Uncomp shows the uncompressed backup size e Size Comp shows the compressed backup size e Log Path shows the path of the log file The logs can be grouped by each of the available columns Just drag one or more column headers on the top of the columns to group the logs by that column In the top menu there is the Export button which can be used to export all columns Selecting one of these two options will open the Sav
326. trix topic Other CD DVD Blu ray Settings The File gt Options gt CD DVD or Blu ray window contains various settings related to the burn process CD DVD or Blu ray Use SCSI Pass Through Direct Layer SPTD Selected by default Backup4all uses this internal burning engine to write CD DVD HD DVD or Blu Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 62 Backup4all 5 ray discs SPTD is a new method of access to storage devices and has the ability to provide direct control of devices without risk of compromising it by some malicious 3rd party filter drivers or other rootkit applications SPTD is currently supported only on Microsoft OS Windows 2000 and above SPTD similar to other access layers is not removed from your system after Backup4all uninstall in order not to disrupt other applications that may use it Use native Win32 Interface SPTI If you have problems backing up using the SPTD method we recommend you to use this option Load CD DVD or Blu ray before backup Check this option if you want the CD DVD or Blu ray to be loaded before backup execution Eject CD DVD or Blu ray disc After Backup You can leave the CD DVD or Blu ray disc ejected after the backup is finished and tested To do so go to File gt Options gt Backup and check the Eject CD DVD or Blu ray after backup option Note e The Use SCSI Pass Through Direct Layer SPTD and Use native Win32 interface SPTI burning methods
327. ttings you have entered are correct If the test was successful The Amazon connection was tested successfully message will be displayed Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 6 3 What do you want to backup In the second step of the New Backup Wizard you must select the files and folders to be used by Backup4all for the backup Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 144 Backup4all 5 What do you want to backup Backup4all Configurations plugin File Folder M lt Backup4all Configuration gt M BH lt Job Settings Folder gt iy lt Tag Settings Folder gt E lt Catalog Folder gt O lt Log Folder gt Re Plugins Folder gt O lt Scheduled jobs Folder gt E lt Host keys Folder gt E lt Ini File gt leh Hitan Files d E E 6 6 A e K Add folder Add files Help What do you want to backup Advanced mode You can e add a whole folder by pressing the Add folder button Previous y Filters clear all to backup all files Size Hiberfil on System Driv A Pagefile on System Dri Temporary Files use z Temporary Folders u lt Type Exclude Cancel e add one or several files by pressing the Add files button e remove any file or folder by selecting it and pressing the
328. ty 2 To execute only a catalog repair for My Pictures backup job bTest t My Pictures RP Priority 2 To execute a repair for Samples tag bTagTest t Samples RP RPWB Priority 2 Backup4all returns exit codes after each task execution backup independent test repair restore or cleanup As a general case if the action was successful the exit code is 0 otherwise is different Here are the possible exit codes e 0 action was successful e 1 action has not started parameter errors syntax errors other errors e 2 action finished with errors Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 248 Backup4all 5 10 4 e 3 action was finished with warnings e 4 independent test was finished with errors e 5 independent test was finished with warnings Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Restore Backup4all uses for each action a small application that runs independently from the main application They can be used to create batch files The command line parameters for restore action are described bellow Backup jobs Syntax bRestore RE job_name DEST path NDL DATE RNC RDE Priority 1 2 3 4 Formatting legend Italic Information that must be supplied by the user Bold Elements that the user must type
329. ual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 265 Folder name Enabling this will allow defining filters based on folder name pattern Enter the directory name that you want to filter in the following format directory_name Backup4all will apply the filter to all the directories that are called directory_name If you want to apply the filter to directories containing a specific word you must enter it in the following format keyword Now Backup4all will apply the filter to all the directories that have the word keyword in their names You can use the Edit or Delete buttons to modify remove the folder name filters defined You can also use environment variables when creating filters temp SystemRoot etc File attributes This section allows the user to specify file filters depending on the file attributes To enable the filter options in this section you have to check the Filter by attributes option There is a list of quick sets to choose for predefined filter criteria e None if this is selected all the file attributes check boxes are unchecked e Custom this is the default option and allows you to check whatever attributes you want e FAT attributes if this is selected a set of File Allocation Table attributes will be used for file filtering e NTFS attributes if this is selected a set of NTFS New Technology File System attributes will be used for filtering Note that these attributes are available only on Win
330. uch Backup Execute C Show main application Close after run Priority Priority U Normal Notifications C Force all notifications to timeout Icon C Use icon of backup job On this page you can define which backup job tag you want to run if the application will be visible or not the task priority and the icon Run e Job Select a backup job from the list to be executed e Tag Select a backup tag from the list to be executed e Alljobs The shortcut will start the back up for all jobs e One Touch Backup The shortcut will start the backup job tag assigned to One Touch Backup Execute Show main application If checked when you will double click the backup shortcut the main application will start and the backup will be executed Furthermore if the Close after run option is checked Backup4all will be closed after the action is executed By default this option is not checked so the action will run in background Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 79 Priority User can change the priority of the action started by the shortcut backup test or cleanup Just move the cursor to a lower or higher priority level Notifications Force all notifications to timeout Use this option if you want to timeout all notification messages during the backup Icon Use icon from backup job If this option is checked the shortcut placed on the desktop quick launch or other
331. ude Network Temporary Files use as exclude Exclude Temporary Folders use as exclude Exclude Removable FTP server SFTP server Azure Amazon S3 Sources Customize Delete Change to Include ype Description Smart File name hiberfil sys Full AND Folder name SystemDrive Differential Incremental Mirror Compression Advanced Save and run Cancel The system selects only files that match the include filter and do not match the exclude filter This Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 181 7 5 1 means the exclude filter is more powerful if a file satisfies both include and exclude filters it will be excluded Include and exclude filters are composed from filter restrictions Two or more filter restrictions in the include filter means that a file must satisfy at least one restriction to be included in the backup Two or more filter restrictions in the exclude filter means that a file must satisfy any restriction to be excluded All filters with the Active box checked will be used by the current backup job To disable a filter just uncheck the Active box Note Filters on files and filters on folders must be created individually If you use a file and a folder filter condition in the same filter files will be filtered only if both filter conditions were met Example If you use a single filter for jpg files and Temp folder onl
332. ult is 2 minutes Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 11 17 Passwords On the Passwords page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item you can configure how the passwords used in Backup4all will be stored Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 292 Backup4all 5 General Preferences Configure notification details for active profile Startup Application folders astaran Store the passwords in the local Windows account Backup O Protect the stored passwords using a master password Filters z Set password Logs and ery O Do not store passwords Backup on demand CD DVD or Blu ray FTP SFTP Azure Amazon S3 Email Updates Notifications Password storage Store the password in the local Windows account The passwords will be stored in local configuration files and retrieved automatically when executing an action The passwords could be retrieved if your Windows account gets compromised No passwords are stored in the destination folders Protect the stored password using a master password The passwords will be stored in local configuration files encrypted using a master password and retrieved automatically when executing an action You will have to enter the master password only
333. up Properties window Backup4all can process multiple backup jobs at the same time You can filter the backup list to see which backup jobs are executed at a certain time From the left side column of the main application you can filter the backup jobs in list You can choose to see all jobs only the running jobs failed jobs or only the jobs containing a specific tag If there are many backups listed you can search for a backup job by typing its name in the Type to search box on the bottom of the Backup List Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Manage Backup Tags Create a new backup tag 1 When creating or editing a backup job using the New Backup Wizard in Advanced mode or Backup Properties press Add new tag and type a new name that does not exist for the Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Main Window 75 backup tag One Backup4all 5 0 2 Jobs Tags Layout Destination e f Description of the backup job lt 3 Local hard drive External hard drive CD DVD or Blu ray Name New Backup 1 Tag New Tag Removable Network FTP server SFTP server Azure Amazon S3 Add new tag Sources a Description Filters Customize
334. up jobs If checked when pressing the File gt New Backup button the New Backup Wizard will be open If unchecked the Backup Properties will be used to create the new job Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Startup The Startup page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item contains startup related settings of the program General PE EER Change startup options Application folders Startap ond tray Start at Windows startup Show Getting Started IV Show tray icon Backup Filters Logs and history Visualization mode Backup on demand CD DVD or Blu ray Manual run Last window state FTF Vindows startu Last window state Scheduled startup Last window state Azure Amazon S3 Email Updates Notifications Passwords Cancel Startup and tray Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 258 Backup4all 5 11 4 Start at Windows startup If checked the program is started when Windows starts using the window state set in the Visualization mode group By default this option is not checked Show Getting Started If checked the Getting Started window is displayed when you start Backup4all Show tray icon If checked the program icon is displayed in the Taskbar Notificatio
335. up to Amazon S3 ccccesccssseeeeeneee sees se nneeeeeeeeeseaeeesneeeeneeeeseaaeseneeeenseeesseesaneaeseeeeeeeeas 39 12 How to Backup to USB or Firewire driveS sssusessnnsenneennenennnennnnnnununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn annen 40 13 How to Send Email Notifications cccceececesceseeeeeeeeeeeenesesneeeeneeeeeeaeseseaeeneeeeeseaeseneeeenseneeeeas 42 14 How to Configure One Touch Backup cccesccesseeceeeeeeeeeeeesneeeenseeeeesaeseneeeeeseeeeseaeseneeeeeseeeeneas 43 15 How to Use One Touch Backup cscccsecceceeeeseseeesneeeenseeeseesesneeeenseeesesaeseseeenseeesseesaseaeeneeeeeneas 43 16 How to Enable Detailed LOGGING cseecseteesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeneeeeeeaeseseaeenseeesseeeseseaeeneeeeneeas 44 Part Ill Backup Types 46 1 Backup Types aia ENA AEEA ANE EEA EAEE ATONE AAEE cudtai 46 2 Smart Backup e r e a tees naka de cts ee ana a a a ea e aaa rea e aea Seea aae aea aaa ea iaaa e ena aiaia 47 SB SPUNBACKUP A ate E A E E E E E 49 4 Ditferential Backu pis 62 i i0 fet cist cielo etl ec ettinia inal el ina nl Eri aaan 50 5 Incremental Backup s 24c2 8 cite evince on Reet avert ee ee eet 51 6 MIRFOriBaCkUpyccccececctececte dice ccitectvatecccdivahcccececetecccdvvatecencecdsccetecedtucderaSzcccetceS ecccsvetececceecsecctereatucets 52 Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup4all 5 COON OA FPF WN h h h d O N O 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Part VI
336. ure that the entered username password values are correct or contact the network administrator to obtain the necessary rights If the destination is missing when the network is disconnected an error message is shown Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 161 t Folder error New Backup Retry in 01 44 min i Cannot create folder dest New Backup 2 The network path was not found Retry Abort backup Selecting Retry in 01 44 min Click to stop C Don t show this message type anymore _ Don t popup the notification window for this message type Go to job Change notification settings Apply default for all and close The user can choose Cancel to stop the backup process or Retry to check the network connection again If the scheduler starts the backup then the system will retry as many times as set in the File gt Options gt Backup window and if still is not possible to access the network destination it will abort the backup process Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 7 3 6 FTP server Backup4all supports backing up to a remote computer or device using FTP File Transfer Protocol connection This is a practical backup destination because the backed up data can be easily accessed from any other c
337. use it Use native Win32 Interface SPTI If you have problems backing up using the SPTD method we recommend you to use this option Other Load CD DVD or Blu ray before backup If checked the CD DVD or Blu ray media is loaded before the execution of a backup This option is Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 272 Backup4all 5 useful when the CD DVD or Blu ray disc was previously ejected by another process Eject CD DVD or Blu ray after backup If checked the CD DVD or Blu ray media is ejected but not reloaded after burning process is finished By default this option is not checked Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic 11 10 FTP The FTP page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item contains FTP settings General F ere Manage FTP servers Preferences Startup When FTP server not ready Application folders Backup Retry times Filters Wait seconds Logs and history Backup on demand Name a CD DVD or Blu ray novaPDF FTP a SFTP Azure Amazon S3 Email Updates Notifications Passwords ajx r cpp grp html sink am r CSS ch htpasswd java asa F csv hpp htt js aSc ctl hgx htx jsp asp d dhtml hta in slog aspx s diz htacc
338. v Block backup Y Y Amazon 3 Azure v x Smart backup x x x AES Encryption 5 Try Standard Try Lite See more features Application will be restarted Automatic online activation After you purchase a license you will receive an email with your licensing information Using the Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Help 297 license key received via email you can easily activate Backup4all automatically if your computer is connected to the Internet During the activation process your license key is verified online and after it is detected as valid you can start using Backup4all 1 Open the activation window from File gt Help by pressing the Enter product key under Registration information Buy Now Buy Backup4all online Tools for working with Backup4all amp Options Customize language display and other program settings Check for Updates Get the latest updates available for Backup4all Backup4all 5 0 TRIAL will expire in 22 days Scheduler Layout B New backup Support e Open Backup k By Open Backup From Backup4all Help a C U O a 7 Get help using Backup4all Take full control of your backup Tools About Backup4all Support Request Backup4all Version 5 0 Build 221 ere etme conoee You Rect hele 2013 Softland All rights reserved amp Options www backup4all com T c Exit Registration information Ba
339. vailable time units are Days Weeks Months and Years By default this period is set to 3 Months Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Options 269 11 8 Delete corresponding log files too This option can be used only if the Delete records older than option is checked This option is equivalent with delete log files older than the period selected above Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup on demand The Backup on demand page of the Options window accessible from the File Options menu item contains settings for the one touch button of some USB FireWire devices General gt Backup on demand configuration Preferences Startup Application folders enee Backup Enable One Touch Backup support Filters What to execute Logs and history Backup job Backup tag CD DVD or Blu ray FTP Exit application when finished Azure Amazon S3 Email Updates Notifications Passwords Cancel Some USB enclosures have a button to start the execution of an associated program If you have such a device you can configure Backup4all to execute a backup job or a backup tag when this button is pressed If your One Touch button device is not detected by Backup4all Backup4all is not natively compat
340. versions you wish to test and press the Test button You can also modify the priority of the test process by moving the slider to a lower or higher priority default is Normal A High priority process finishes faster but consumes more resources than a Normal priority process You can also test a backup execution if you switch to Backup View right click on a version and select Test To be sure the test automatically runs after each backup you should open the Backup Properties window by pressing the Properties button E from the application s toolbar and in the Advanced tab make sure the Test after backup option is checked If the test was executed automatically after backup and it failed the Error icon appears in front of the backup job icon Read the log file for details about the errors from Jobs tab History section View Log The icon will disappear when the backup job will be successful A Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 30 Backup4all 5 2 6 How to Password Protect a Backup Passwords are used to protect your backup files from unauthorized access Setting the Password The Encryption Settings section is shown on the Compression page of the Backup Properties window or in
341. ween each attempt to connect Most FTP sites can also monitor for devices that hammer and once detected the server will ban access to the offending IP address either permanently or for a limited amount of time Thus when you set the retry times intervals in File gt Options gt FTP you should use 60 seconds or more 3 If you backup important data to a remote location using FTP encrypt the zip files for increased security In this case even if another person manages to gain unauthorized access to the FTP your files will still be protected 4 Use XCRC when testing the FTP backups faster Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Connecting in Passive Mode Some FTP servers require the connection to be established in a passive mode i e your computer establishes the connection so the flow of data is set up and initiated by you Most Web browsers which act as FTP clients use passive FTP by default because companies prefer it as a safety measure So switching to passive mode may be necessary with some FTP servers that are behind firewalls that do not allow connections from outside To set Backup4all to connect using Passive mode 1 On the Backup Properties gt FTP server window or File gt Options gt FTP click Edit configuration 2 Check the Use passive mode for tran
342. when you start the application or when the first backup job starts No passwords are stored in the destination folder Do not store passwords The passwords will not be stored anywhere You will have to enter the passwords everytime a job action starts This is the most secure option Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Help 294 Backup4all 5 12 Help The Help page from File menu of Backup4all contains information about the version and edition you have installed as well as the information about the registration status If Backup4all is registered you can see the Registration Name and Registration Key otherwise it will show as UNREGISTERED and mention the number of days left until the trial version expires Support Backup4all Help Before asking for support please make sure you have installed the latest version of Backup4all Also visit our online Knowledgebase as it contains valuable information and your questions might already be answered there Support request If you can t find an answer to your questions in our Knowledgebase please go to Backup4all s File gt Help menu and click on Support Request This will open an email and it will include at the bottom some basic inform
343. xplorer Favo 7 2 2013 3 29 10 PM Backup Summary e Checking sources destination e Creating file list e Archiving files e Merging files e Burning CD DVD or Blu ray e Saving catalog Other information added to the logs the total number of files added to backup the total size of files added to backup and the number of files excluded Restore Logging File Edit Format View Help 7 2 2013 3 30 48 PM Backup4all 5 151 7 2 2013 3 30 48 PM Operating system Windows 8 7 2 2013 3 30 48 PM Restoring files from backup 7 2 2013 3 30 48 PM Name Internet Explorer Favo 7 2 2013 3 30 48 PM Processing zip file C Users Logged operations Logged operation except mirror backup Processing zip file The total number of restore files is logged and the start end time of restoring Test Logging Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 124 Backup4all 5 File Edit Format View Help 7 2 2013 3 32 25 PM Backup4all 5 151 7 2 2013 3 32 25 PM Operating system Windows 8 7 2 2013 3 32 26 PM Starting test on New Backup 7 2 2013 3 32 26 PM 1 Full 7 1 2013 1 31 7 2 2013 3 32 26 PM Name Internet Explorer Favo Logged operations Testing zip file or Testing files for mirror backup without zip The result of the operation is also logged Cleanup Logging Edit Format View Help 7 2 2013 3 34 17 PM Backup4all 5 151 7 2 2013 3 34 17 PM Operating system Windows 8 7 2 2013 3
344. y e View Log e Last Backup Log shows the latest backup log for the selected backup job If there is no log file the menu is disabled e Last Restore Log shows the latest restore log for the selected backup job If there is no log file the menu is disabled e Last Test Log shows the latest test log for the selected backup job If there is no log file the menu is disabled e Last Cleanup Log shows the latest cleanup log for the selected backup job If there is no log file the menu is disabled e Last Statistics Log shows the latest statistics log for the selected backup job If there is no log file the menu is disabled e History opens the history page for that job e Open Log Folder opens the folder where all log files are stored e Messages opens the application messages popup If there are no messages the button is disabled Tags The Tags toolbar contains all the Backup4all buttons which can be applied on backup tags Manage Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 70 Backup4all 5 yj amp Rename New y Delete Manage e New creates a new tag in the left side list e Rename renames a tag from the left side list e Delete deletes a tag from the left side list Execute ys SS KE AZ gt d Backup Restore Repair Test Clean X X Y Execute e Backup e Backup performs the backup type defined in Backup Properties for all jobs containing that tag e Full per
345. y attribute will be selected e Encrypted only NTFS if checked files with encrypted attribute will be selected e Not indexed only NTFS if checked files with not indexed attribute will be selected e Offline only NTFS if checked files with offline attribute will be selected e Reparse point only NTFS if checked files with reparse point attribute will be selected e Sparse file only NTFS if checked files with sparse file attribute will be selected For example if you want to include files with read only and archived attributes set you have to check both attributes checkboxes in a single restriction If you want to include files with read only or archived attributes set you have to make two separate restrictions one for read only and another for archived File dates This section allows the user to build restrictions based on file dates and times To enable options in this section check the Filter by date option Filters in this section can be applied by selecting one of the available date filters e date accessed e date and time accessed e date modified e date and time modified e date created e date and time created You can compare these dates and times with a fixed date or a relative date today yesterday one week ago or one month ago Comparison operators available e lt gt date and time not equal to fixed or relative date e lt date and time less than or equal to fixed or relative date Backup4all 5
346. y size descending before copying them on the removable drive This way it will start with the larger files and put the smaller ones towards the end of the backup optimizing the space used on the removable drive By default this option is not checked Be aware that you can restore only from the latest version of a mirror backup from the Backup4all interface You can restore however manually previous versions as they are accessible from any file manager like Windows Explorer Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland Backup Properties 195 7 7 Compression On the Compression page you can configure the compression and encryption settings General 3 Destination J amp Local hard drive These settings apply only if you are using a backup type with zip compression e g Full backup External hard drive Compression and encryption Zip compression CD DVD or Blu ray Removable Level Normal compression Medium Network Do not compress files of type C Always use temporary folder to create zip files Use alternate zipping mode FTP server SFTP server Azure Encrypt the zip files Amazon 3 No encryption Strong encryption AES 128 bit strong Sources O i i i Filt
347. y the jpg files from Temp folder will be filtered If you use separate filters for files and folders all jog files and whole Temp folder will be filtered You can manage filter restrictions using the buttons e Add include this will open a new Filter Properties window from where you can add a new include restriction to the filters list e Add exclude this will open a new Filter Properties window from where you can add a new exclude restriction to the filters list e Edit will open the selected filter s properties window You will be able to modify the selected restriction e Copy this will create a copy of the selected filter e Delete will remove the selected filter from the list of include or exclude filters Note Some of the features mentioned on this page might not be available in your edition The Professional edition includes all the features For a comparison between editions please check feature matrix topic Customize On the Customize page you can override the main backup filter It will show a tree with all selected sources for the backup job Backup4all 5 User Manual Copyright 2014 Softland 182 Backup4all 5 General Dediination Do you want to refine the file filters Local hard drive External hard drive SES CD DVD or Blu ray File Folder i Modified Attributes Removable Network FTP server SFTP server Azure Amazon S3 Sources Refine filters for the s
348. ype in there the backup numbers you want to test The order you type them in is the order they will be tested in Use the character to test all backup numbers or the character to test only the last backup e Repair you can schedule a repair action to be executed The missing or corrupted files from destination will be backed up again e Repair catalog only if this option is checked only the backup catalog will be repaired the missing or corrupted files in destination will be removed from the backup catalog so they will be backed up again next time e Cleanup at the scheduled date it deletes the selected backup numbers When Cleanup is selected other options become available to filter the backup numbers that will be deleted e Newer than if checked backup numbers that are newer than the selected date will be deleted when the scheduled Cleanup operation runs e Older than if checked backup numbers that are older than the selected date will be deleted when the scheduled Cleanup operation runs e Older than fixed date backup numbers that are Older than a certain fixed date will be deleted when the scheduled Cleanup operation runs e Do not delete Full backups if this is checked the full backups will be kept even if they fall into the range of files filtered for deletion e Do not delete Differential backups if this is checked the differential backups will be kept even if they fall into the range of files filtered for deletion Note t
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
来訪者登録管理システム Manual Avanzado de Usuario tk02_omo_manual_output0821 Mémento conducteur SDIS 14. bppt スーパーソイル - IHIスター Agilent J-BERT N4903B High-Performance Serial BERT User Manual - Digi International Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file